JAEA-Data/Code

2010-022

PHITS: Particle and Heavy Ion Transport code System, Version 2.23

Koji NIITA*, Norihiro MATSUDA, Yosuke IWAMOTO, Hiroshi IWASE**, Tatsuhiko SATO,
Hiroshi NAKASHIMA,Yukio SAKAMOTO and Lembit SIHVER***
Division of Environment and Radiation Sciences,
Nuclear Science and Engineering Directorate
Japan Atomic Energy Agency
Tokai-mura, Naka-gun, Ibaraki-ken(Received October 4, 2010)
A Particle and Heavy-Ion Transport code System PHITS has been developed under the collaborationof JAEA (Japan Atomic Energy Agency), RIST (Research Organization for Information Science andTechnology) and KEK (High Energy Accelerator Research Organization). PHITS can deal with thetransport of all particles (nucleons, nuclei, mesons, photons, and electrons) over wide energy ranges, using
several nuclear reaction models and nuclear data libraries. Geometrical configuration of the simulation
can be set with GG (General Geometry) or CG (Combinatorial Geometry). Various quantities such as heat
deposition, track length and production yields can be deduced from the simulation, using implemented
estimator functions called ―tally‖. The code also has a function to draw 2D and 3D figures of thecalculated results as well as the setup geometries, using a code ANGEL. Because of these features, PHITS
has been widely used for various purposes such as designs of accelerator shielding, radiation therapy andspace exploration.
Recently PHITS introduces an event generater for particle transpotrt parts in the low energy region.
Thus, PHITS was completely rewritten for the introduction of the event generator for neutron-induced
reactions in energy region less than 20 MeV. Furthermore, several new tallis were incooporated for
estimation of the relatve biological effects. This document provides a manual of the new PHITS.

Keywords: PHITS, Heavy ion, Nucleus, Transport, Reaction, event generator, correlation*Research Organization for Information Science and Technology** High Energy Accelerator Research Organization (KEK)*** Chalmers University of Technology

1

JAEA-Data/Code

2010-022
核子・重イオン輸送計算コード PHITS バージョン 2.23

日本原子力研究開発機構原子力基礎工学研究部門
環境・放射線科学ユニット
仁井田浩二*、松田規宏、岩元洋介、岩瀬広**、佐藤達彦、中島宏、坂本幸夫、Lembit SIHVER***(2010 年 10 月 4 日受理)

粒子・重イオン輸送計算コードPHITS は日本原子力研究開発機構、高度情報科学技術研究機構、高エネルギー加速器研究機構の協力の下、開発された。PHITSは原子核反応モデル及び核データを用いて、広いエネルギー領域にわたり、様々な粒子(核子、重イオン、中間子、光子、電子)の輸送を取り扱うことができる。シミュレーションの幾何学的な形状は、 GG(General
Geometry)及びCG(Combinational Geometry) により作成される。‖タリー‖といった見積もり機能を使用することで、熱付与、飛跡、生成収率といった様々な量を導くことができる。コードは付属の‖Angel‖コードを使用することで、セットアップ形状だけでなく計算結果の2次元及び３次元図を作成する機能を持つ。これらの機能によりPHITSは加速器遮蔽、宇宙開発、放射線治療といった様々な目的に使用されている。
最近、PHITSに20MeV以下の低エネルギー中性子入射反応に対するイベントジェネレータが導入され、さらに生物学的な効果を見積もるためのいくつかの新しいタリーが導入された。このレポートは新しいPHITS2コードのマニュアルとなる。

*高度情報科学技術研究機構** 高エネルギー加速器研究機構*** チャルマー工科大学

2

Contents
1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 9
2 Models implemented in the code ............................................................................................................. 92.1. JAM model ........................................................................................................................................... 9
2.2 JQMD model ....................................................................................................................................... 15
2.3 New features of PHITS ....................................................................................................................... 19
3 Installation .............................................................................................................................................. 21
3.1 Source files and data files.................................................................................................................... 21
3.2 Compiling PHITS code ....................................................................................................................... 22
3.3 Compiling ANGEL ............................................................................................................................. 26
3.4 Executable file ..................................................................................................................................... 27
3.5 Terminating PHITS code ..................................................................................................................... 27
3.6 Array sizes ........................................................................................................................................... 28
4 Input File ................................................................................................................................................. 30
4.1 Sections ............................................................................................................................................... 30
4.2 Reading control ................................................................................................................................... 31
4.3 Inserting files ....................................................................................................................................... 32
4.4 User definition constants ..................................................................................................................... 33
4.5 Using mathematical expressions ......................................................................................................... 33
4.6 Using the CG or GG ............................................................................................................................ 33
4.7 Particle identification .......................................................................................................................... 33
5 Sections format ....................................................................................................................................... 37
5.1 [ T i t l e ] section ................................................................................................................................ 37
5.2 [ P a r a m e t e r s ] section ................................................................................................................. 37
5.3 [ S o u r c e ] section ............................................................................................................................ 58
5.4 [ M a t e r i a l ] section ....................................................................................................................... 86
5.5 [ B o d y ] section ................................................................................................................................ 89
5.6 [ R e g i o n ] section ........................................................................................................................... 91
5.7 [ C e l l ] section .................................................................................................................................. 93
5.8 [ S u r f a c e ] section.......................................................................................................................... 96
5.9 [ T r a n s f o r m ] section ................................................................................................................. 101
5.10 Examples of repeated structures and lattices ................................................................................... 103
5.11 [ I m p o r t a n c e ] section ............................................................................................................. 108
5.12 [WeightWindow ] section ................................................................................................................ 110
5.13 [ V o l u m e ] section ...................................................................................................................... 111
5.14 [ T e m p e r a t u r e ] section.......................................................................................................... 111
3

5.15 [ Brems Bias ] section ..................................................................................................................... 112
5.16 [ PhotonWeight ] section ................................................................................................................. 112
5.17 [ Forced Collisions ] section............................................................................................................ 113
5.18 [ M a g n e t i c F i e l d ] section..................................................................................................... 114
5.19 [ C o u n t e r ] section ..................................................................................................................... 116
5.20 [ Reg Name ] section ....................................................................................................................... 117
5.21 [ Mat Name Color ] section ............................................................................................................. 117
5.22 [ Mat Time Change ] section ........................................................................................................... 120
5.23 [ Super Mirror ] section ................................................................................................................... 121
5.24 [ Elastic Option ] section ................................................................................................................. 122
5.25 [ T i m e r ] section .......................................................................................................................... 122
6 Common parameters for tallies........................................................................................................... 123
6.1 Geometrical mesh.............................................................................................................................. 123
6.2 Energy mesh ...................................................................................................................................... 126
6.3 LET mesh .......................................................................................................................................... 127
6.4 Time mesh ......................................................................................................................................... 127
6.5 Angle mesh ........................................................................................................................................ 127
6.6 Mesh definition ................................................................................................................................. 127
6.7 Other tally definitions........................................................................................................................ 129
7 Tally input format ................................................................................................................................ 137
7.1 [ T - T r a c k ] section ....................................................................................................................... 137
7.2 [ T - C r o s s ] section ....................................................................................................................... 140
7.3 [ T - Y i e l d ] section........................................................................................................................ 143
7.4 [ T - H e a t ] section.......................................................................................................................... 146
7.5 [ T - S t a r ] section ........................................................................................................................... 149
7.6 [ T - T i m e ] section ......................................................................................................................... 151
7.7 [ T - D P A ] section ........................................................................................................................... 154
7.8 [ T - P r o d u c t ] section .................................................................................................................. 157
7.9 [ T - L E T ] section ........................................................................................................................... 161
7.10 [ T - S E D ] section......................................................................................................................... 163
7.11 [ T - Deposit ] section ...................................................................................................................... 166
7.12[ T - Deposit2 ] section ..................................................................................................................... 168
7.13 [ T - G s h o w ] section ................................................................................................................... 170
7.14 [ T - R s h o w ] section ................................................................................................................... 172
7.15 [ T - 3 D s h o w ] section ................................................................................................................ 174
8 Volume and Area calculation by tally function .................................................................................. 180

49 Processing dump file ............................................................................................................................ 183
10 Output cutoff data format ................................................................................................................. 188
11 Supplementary explanation for region error checking ................................................................... 189
12 Additional explanation for the parallel computing ......................................................................... 189
12.1 PHITS input file definition .............................................................................................................. 189
12.2 maxcas, maxbch definition .............................................................................................................. 189
12.3 Treatment of abnormal end ............................................................................................................. 189
12.4 PHITS startup .................................................................................................................................. 190
12.5 ncut, gcut, pcut and dumpall file definition in the PHITS............................................................... 190
12.6 Read in file definition in the PHITS................................................................................................ 191
13 FAQ...................................................................................................................................................... 192
14 Concluding remarks ........................................................................................................................... 195

5

目次
1 緒言............................................................................................................................................................ 9
2 コードに含まれる物理モデルと最近の開発 ....................................................................................... 92.1. JAM モデル ........................................................................................................................................ 9
2.2 JQMD モデル .................................................................................................................................... 15
2.3 PHITS の新しい特徴 .......................................................................................................................... 19
3 インストール ......................................................................................................................................... 21
3.1 ソースとデータファイル ................................................................................................................ 21
3.2 PHITS コードのコンパイル ............................................................................................................. 22
3.3 ANGEL のコンパイル ...................................................................................................................... 26
3.4 実行ファイル ..................................................................................................................................... 27
3.5 事項の途中中断 ................................................................................................................................. 27
3.6 配列の大きさ ..................................................................................................................................... 28
4 入力ファイル .......................................................................................................................................... 30
4.1 セクション ........................................................................................................................................ 30
4.2 読み込みコントロール ..................................................................................................................... 31
4.3 ファイルの挿入 ................................................................................................................................ 32
4.4 ユーザー定義定数 ............................................................................................................................ 33
4.5 数式の利用 ......................................................................................................................................... 33
4.6 CG と GG の使い分け..................................................................................................................... 33
4.7 粒子の標識 ......................................................................................................................................... 33
5 Sections format ....................................................................................................................................... 37
5.1 [ T i t l e ] セクション....................................................................................................................... 37
5.2 [ P a r a m e t e r s ] セクション........................................................................................................ 37
5.3 [ S o u r c e ] セクション .................................................................................................................. 58
5.4 [ M a t e r i a l ] セクション .............................................................................................................. 86
5.5 [ B o d y ] セクション....................................................................................................................... 89
5.6 [ R e g i o n ] セクション .................................................................................................................. 91
5.7 [ C e l l ] セクション......................................................................................................................... 93
5.8 [ S u r f a c e ] セクション ................................................................................................................ 96
5.9 [ T r a n s f o r m ] セクション........................................................................................................ 101
5.10 繰り返し幾何形状の例題 ............................................................................................................. 103
5.11 [ I m p o r t a n c e ] セクション ................................................................................................... 108
5.12 [WeightWindow ] セクション ...................................................................................................... 110
5.13 [ V o l u m e ] セクション............................................................................................................. 111
65.14 [ T e m p e r a t u r e ] セクション ................................................................................................ 111
5.15 [ Brems Bias ] セクション ............................................................................................................ 112
5.16 [ PhotonWeight ] セクション ....................................................................................................... 112
5.17 [ Forced Collisions ] セクション .................................................................................................. 113
5.18 [ M a g n e t i c F i e l d ] セクション ........................................................................................... 114
5.19 [ C o u n t e r ] セクション ........................................................................................................... 116
5.20 [ Reg Name ] セクション ............................................................................................................. 117
5.21 [ Mat Name Color ] セクション ................................................................................................... 117
5.22 [ Mat Time Change ] セクション ................................................................................................. 120
5.23 [ Super Mirror ] セクション ......................................................................................................... 121
5.24 [ Elastic Option ] セクション ....................................................................................................... 122
5.25 [ T i m e r ] セクション................................................................................................................. 122
6 タリー共通パラメーターの書式 ....................................................................................................... 123
6.1 形状メッシュ ................................................................................................................................... 123
6.2 エネルギーメッシュ ...................................................................................................................... 126
6.3 LET メッシュ ................................................................................................................................. 127
6.4 時間メッシュ ................................................................................................................................... 127
6.5 角度メッシュ ................................................................................................................................... 127
6.6 メッシュ定義分 .............................................................................................................................. 127
6.7 他のタリー定義分 ........................................................................................................................... 129
7 タリー入力書式 ................................................................................................................................... 137
7.1 [ T - T r a c k ] セクション ............................................................................................................. 137
7.2 [ T - C r o s s ] セクション ............................................................................................................. 140
7.3 [ T - Y i e l d ] セクション .............................................................................................................. 143
7.4 [ T - H e a t ] セクション ................................................................................................................ 146
7.5 [ T - S t a r ] セクション ................................................................................................................. 149
7.6 [ T - T i m e ] セクション ............................................................................................................... 151
7.7 [ T - D P A ] セクション ................................................................................................................. 154
7.8 [ T - P r o d u c t ] セクション ........................................................................................................ 157
7.9 [ T - L E T ] セクション.................................................................................................................. 161
7.10 [ T - S E D ] セクション ............................................................................................................... 163
7.11 [ T - Deposit ] セクション ............................................................................................................ 166
7.12[ T - Deposit2 ] セクション ........................................................................................................... 168
7.13 [ T - G s h o w ] セクション ......................................................................................................... 170
7.14 [ T - R s h o w ] セクション ......................................................................................................... 172
7.15 [ T - 3 D s h o w ] セクション ...................................................................................................... 174
8 タリーを用いた体積、面積計算 ....................................................................................................... 180
79 ダンプファイルの処理 ........................................................................................................................ 183
10 出力データフォーマット .................................................................................................................. 188
11 領域エラーチェックのための補足 .................................................................................................. 189
12 並列版のための解説 .......................................................................................................................... 189
12.1 PHITS 入力ファイルの指定方法 ................................................................................................. 189
12.2 maxcas, maxbch の指定方法 ......................................................................................................... 189
12.3 異常終了の処理 ............................................................................................................................. 189
12.4 PHITS の起動................................................................................................................................. 190
12.5 ncut, gcut, pcut, dumpall ファイルの指定 ................................................................................... 190
12.6 読み込みファイルの指定 ............................................................................................................. 191
13 良くある質問と回答 .......................................................................................................................... 192
14 結言 ...................................................................................................................................................... 195

8

1 Introduction
Particle and heavy ion transport code is an essential implement in design and study of spacecrafts
and accelerator facilities. We have therefore developed the multi-purpose Monte Carlo Particle and Heavy
Ion Transport code System, PHITS1-1, 1-2), based on the NMTC/JAM1-3). The physical processes which weshould deal with in a multipurpose simulation code can be divided into two categories, transport process
and collision process. In the transport process, PHITS can simulate a motion under external fields such as
magnetic and gravity. Without the external fields, neutral particles move along a straight trajectory withconstant energy up to the next collision point. However, charged particles and heavy ions interact manytimes with electrons in the material losing energy and changing direction. PHITS treats ionization
processes not as collision but as a transport process under an external field. The average dE/dx is given by
the charge density of the material and the momentum of the particle taking into account the fluctuations of
the energy loss and the angular deviation. The second category of the physical processes is the collision
with the nucleus in the material. In addition to the collision, we consider the decay of the particle as aprocess in this category. The total reaction cross section, or the life time of the particle is an essential
quantity in the determination of the mean free path of the transport particle. According to the mean freepath, PHITS chooses the next collision point using the Monte Carlo method. To generate the secondary
particles of the collision, we need the information of the final states of the collision. For neutron induced
reactions in low energy region, PHITS employs the cross sections from Evaluated Nuclear Data libraries.
For high energy neutrons and other particles, we have incorporated two models, JAM 1-4) and JQMD 1-5) tosimulate the particle induced reactions up to 200 GeV and the nucleus–nucleus collisions, respectively.
Recently PHITS introduces an event generater for particle transpotrt parts in the low energy region.
Thus, PHITS was completely rewritten for the introduction of the event generator for neutron-induced
reactions in energy region less than 20 MeV. Furthermore, several new tallis were incooporated for
estimation of the relatve biological effects. This report includes descriptions on new features andfunctions introduced into the code. For examples, GG geometry, parallelization, DPA tally, neutron,
photon and electron transportation, and detailed descriptions how to setup the geometry as well. In orderto keep complihensive descriptions as the manual of PHITS, this report includes description on some partsof the NMTC/JAM code, which is an origin of code structure of PHITS.
2 Models implemented in the code
In this section, we describe the main features of PHITS, the basic models to simulate nuclear
reactions and show comparisons of predictions of PHITS with experimental data.
2.1. JAM model
2.1.1 Main feature of JAM
JAM (Jet AA Microscopic Transport Model2-1) is a hadronic cascade model, which explicitly treats
all established hadronic states including resonances characterized by explicit spin and isospin as well as
their anti-particles. We have parametrized all hadron-hadron cross sections based on a resonance modeland string model by fitting available experimental data. At center of mass energys < 4 GeV, theinelastic hadron-hadron collisions are described by resonance formations and their decays, and at higher
9energies, string formation and their fragmentation into hadrons are assumed.
We have parametrized the resonance formation cross sections in terms of an extended Breit-Wigner
form and used established data2-2) for decay probabilities to various channels. At an energy range aboves = 4~5 GeV, the (isolated) resonance picture breaks down because width of resonances becomeswider and which their spacing get closer. Hadronic interactions at an energy range 4~5 <s < 10~100

GeV is called ―soft process‖ which is characterized by a small transverse momentum transfer, and string
phenomenological models are known to describe the data for such soft process well. In this picture, ahadron-hadron collision leads to a longitudinal string like excitation. In actual description of the string
formation, we follow a prescription adopted in HIJING model2-3). The strings are assumed to hadronize
via quark-antiquark or diquark-antidiquark creation. As for the fragmentation of the strings, we adopted
Lund fragmentation model PYTHIA6.12-4).
In Figure 2-1, we show a fitted total cross section with experimental data2-2) and inelastic components
of pp collision as a function of the c.m. energy. Inelastic cross sections are assumed to be filled up by theresonance formations (gray region) up tos = 3~4 GeV. At higher energies, the difference between

experimental inelastic cross section and sum of the resonance formation cross sections are assigned to thestring formation. The following resonance excitation channels are implemented for the nucleon-nucleon
scattering in JAM:s (GeV)

Figure 2-1: Total cross section and inelastic components of pp collision as a function of the c.m. energy.

(1) NN ➝ N(1232),(2) NN ➝ NN*,

(3) NN ➝(1232)(1232),(4) NN ➝ N*, (5) NN ➝ N*(1232), (6) NN➝ (1232)*,(7) NN ➝ N*N*,(8) NN ➝ N**, (9) NN ➝ **10

Here N* and * represent higher non-exotic baryonic states below 2 GeV/c2. In Fig. 2-1, we also plot
contributions from the above channels (1) (dashed line), (2) (dot-dot-dashed line), (4) (long dashed line)
and a sum of the other channels (dot-dashed line) to the resonance formation cross section.
For nuclear reactions in JAM, we use a full cascade method described in the following. Each hadron
has its position and momentum and moves along a straight line until it experiences next hadron-hadronand hadron-lepton collisions, decay or absorption. The initial position of each nucleon is sampled by aparameterized distribution of nuclear density. Fermi momentum of nucleons is assigned according to the
local Fermi momentum as a function of the density. We do not take into account the mean field effects
except for the initial nucleons. The initial nucleons in a target nucleus stay on the initial positions until acollision with other hadrons take place. The interaction probabilities of hadron-hadron collision aredetermined by the method of so-called ‖closest distance approach―; if the minimum relative distance forany pair of particles becomes less than an interaction range specified bytotal cross section for the pair at the c.m. energy ( s ) /  , where  ( s ) is thes , then the particles are assumed to collide. Thiscascade method has been widely used to simulate high energy nucleus-nucleus collisions. However,geometrical interpretation of the cross section violates causality and the time ordering of the collisions ingeneral differs from one reference-frame to the other. These problems have been studied by several
authors2-5,2-6). We have adopted a similar procedure as that in Refs.2-5) for the collision criterion to mimic
the reference-frame dependence. Pauli-blocking for the final nucleons in two-body collisions are also
considered.
2.1.2 Elementary cross sections of hadron-hadron
Details of the parametrization of hadron-hadron cross sections in JAM is described in Ref.2-1). Here,
we demonstrate typical examples of the elementary hadron-hadron cross sections obtained by JAM andcompare results with experimental data.
In Figure 2-2 we show calculated rapidity y and transverse momentum distributions of protons,
positive and negative pions for proton-proton collisions at 12 GeV/c incident laboratory momentum andalso data from Ref. 2-7). A proton stopping behavior around y~0 and pion yields are well described by
JAM. Within JAM model, fast protons come from resonance decays and mid-rapidity protons from string
fragmentation.

11

Figure 2-2: A rapidity y distributions (left panel) and transverse momentum distributions (right panel) of proton,
+ and - in pp collisions at 12 GeV/c incident laboratory momentum. Histograms are results obtained with
JAM, while the squares denote experimental data are from Ref.2-8).
Figure 2-3 shows energy dependence of exclusive pion production cross sections in pp reactions. We

compare results of the simulation with data2-8). Overall agreement is achieved in these exclusive pion
productions. Smooth transition from the resonance picture to the string picture at

s = 3 ~ 4 GeV isrealized since no irregularity of the energy dependence appears in the calculated results.
As other examples of the hadron-hadron cross sections, we plot, in Fig. 2-4, the total and elastic -p
and K+p cross sections parametrized by JAM (upper panel), and energy dependence of the exclusive crosssections of K-p ➝0and K-n ➝- (lower panel). Data are taken from Refs.2-2,2-9).

These examples indicate that the parametrization of the elementary hadron-hadron cross sections in
JAM is accurate enough for high energy particle transport calculations.

12s (GeV)s (GeV)

Figure 2-3 Energy dependence of exclusive pion production cross sections for proton-proton collision as afunction of the c.m. energy. Solid lines are results obtained with JAM, while the squares denote experimental
data from Ref.2-8).

13

s (GeV)s (GeV)

Figure 2-4 Parametrization of the total and elastic -p and K+p cross sections (upper panel), and energy
dependence of exclusive cross sections of K-p➝ 0 and K-n ➝ - (lower panel). Data are taken from

Refs2-2,2-9).

14

2.2 JQMD model
JQMD (JAERI Quantum Molecular Dynamics) code 2-10) has been widely used to analyze various
aspects of heavy ion reactions as well as of nucleon-induced reactions 2-11, 2-12). In the QMD model, a
nucleus is described as a self-binding system of nucleons, which are interacting with each other througheffective interactions in a framework of molecular dynamics. One can estimate yields of emitted lightparticles, fragments and of excited residual nuclei resulting from heavy-ion collisions. The QMD
simulation, JAM simulation as well, describes a dynamical stage of nuclear reactions. At the end of the
dynamical stage, we will get excited nuclei from these simulations. To get final observables, these excitednuclei should decay in a statistical way. We have employed GEM model 2-13) (generalized evaporation
model) for light particle evaporation and fission process of the excited residual nucleus.
So far the QMD model has shed light on several exciting topics in heavy-ion physics, for example,
multifragmentation, flow of the nuclear matter, and energetic particle productions 2-14). In Fig. 2-5 weshow two examples of basic observables from heavy-ion reactions calculated by JQMD code. In Fig.
2-5(a) we represent results of − energy spectra for the reaction 12C+12C at 800 MeV/u in lab. The resultof JQMD code reproduces experimental data 2-15). We notice that this calculation has been done in thesame formulation and also with the same parameter set as used in nucleon-induced reactions 2-11, 2-12). Next
example is neutron energy spectra from the 400 MeV/u 12C incident reaction on 208Pb, which is shown in
Fig. 2-5(b). Neutrons produced in heavy-ion reactions is very important in shielding design of spacecrafts
and other facilities because of their large attenuation length in shielding materials. Secondary neutrons
from heavyion reactions have been systematically measured using thin and thick targets at HIMAC 2-16 2-20)

facility. Fig. 2-5(b) shows that JQMD code roughly reproduces measured cross sections for C beams

with thin target.

15

Figure 2-5 (a) (left panel) − energy spectra for the reaction 12C (800MeV/u)+12C and (b) (right panel) neutronenergy spectra for the reaction 12C (400MeV/u)+208Pb at different laboratory angles as indicated in the figure.
The solid histograms and the solid lines are the results of the JQMD code and the open circles and solid squares
denote the experimental data taken from 2-15, 2-16). The ordinate of left panel is the Lorentz invariant double
differential cross section as a function of the momentum of the emitted pion, while the ordinate of the rightpanel is the double differential cross section as a function of the neutron energy.

PHITS has incorporated JQMD code for the collision part of the nucleus–nucleus reactions to
describe the secondary neutron yields from the thick target. In order to investigate the accuracy of the
PHITS code in the heavy ion transport calculation, we have first compared the results with theexperimental data measured by Kurosawa et al. The measured secondary neutrons produced from thick(stopping length) targets of C, Al, Cu, and Pb bombarded with various heavy ions from He to Xe. Incident
energies ranged from 100 to 800 MeV/u from HIMAC. Here we show two examples of the comparisonsin Fig. 2-6. It is confirmed from these comparison with measurements that the PHITS code provides goodresults on the angular distributions of secondary neutron energy spectra produced from thick carbon,
aluminum, copper, and lead targets bombarded by 100 MeV/u carbon, 400 MeV/u carbon, and 400
MeV/u iron ions.

16

Figure 2-6 Comparison of the neutron fluence calculated with PHITS and the measured data for 100 MeV/u C
ion on C target (left panel) and 400 MeV/u Fe ion on Pb target (right panel).

17

Next validation of PHITS is the comparisons of the spallation products induced in a thick target byhigh energy heavy ions. Yashima et al. systematically measured the residual radioactivities by irradiatingAr(230, 400 MeV/u), Si(800 MeV/u), Ne(100, 230, 400 MeV/u), C(100, 230, 400 MeV/u), He(100, 230
MeV/u) and p(100, 230 MeV) ions on a Cu target at HIMAC. They have compared the PHITS resultswith the experimental results of the production cross sections. One of the results for Cu sample of Ar
induced reaction at 230 MeV/u is shown in Fig. 2-7. The results of PHITS agree in general with theexperimental values within a factor of 2, except for heavy products close to target nuclide and the specificproducts in the lighter mass region.

Figure 2-7 Comparison of production cross section calculated with PHITS and the measured data for 230
MeV/u Ar ion on Cu target.

182.3 New features of PHITS
2.3.1 Event generator mode for low energy neutron incident reactions

Energy and momentum are not conserved in an event of transport calculations based one-bodyBolzmann equation with the nuclear data base if there are more than 2 particles in the final state. They areconserved as an average over many Monte Carlo events. Moreover, solutions of Boltzmann equation
include only mean values of the one-body observables in the phase space. It cannot give us two-body andhigher correlations, since Bolzmann equation and also the nuclear data base has no information for thetwo-body and higher correlations. A typical example of such higher correlation is deposit energy
distribution treated in [T-Heat] tally. This cannot be calculated by one-body Bolzmann equation.
For high enregy nuclear reactions, there is no enough evaluated data base. Then we employed somenuclear reaction models, such as JAM and QMD. These reaction models can describe all ejectiles of thereaction keeping the energy and momentum by the Monte Carlo method.Therefore we can extract any
information from the transport calculation with these reaction models. In this sense, these transport codes
are called as ‖event generators‖.
In PHITS, we have two domains, event generator for high energy and transport for low energy with
the nuclear data. Recently, even in low energy fields, the correlated quantities, such as the deposit energy
distribution, are often required, for examples, estimations of single upset error of semiconductor,
biological effects and in a microdosimetry field. For these requirement, we changed the transport
algorithm for low-energy neutrons from that based on solving Boltmann equation (in a similar manner as
MCNP) to the original one based on the concept of the event generator, and developed an ‖event
generator mode‖ for all energy region in PHITS . This mode is chosen by ―e-mode=1‖ in the parameter
section.
The detail of this mode will be published elsewhere. Here we explain the outline of this mode. The
evaluated nuclear data base can describe the total cross section, the channel cross sections, i.e. capture,elastic, (n,n’) and (n,Nn’) cross sections, and inclusive double differential cross sections of outgoingneutrons. From these information, energy and momentum of the residual nucleus are not determineduniquely, since information is lacking. Therefore, we have developed a model to determine the energy andmomentum of all ejectile by using information of the data base for neutron and a special statistical decay
model. At first, we use the total cross section and channel cross sections of the data base. For each channel,
we assume the following models. The excitation energy and momentum of composite nucleus are
determined uniquely from incident energy and target nucleus. We apply a special statistical decay modelin which the decay width of neutron is zero. Then we can determine all information of ejectiles, in thiscase, charged particles, photon and residual nucleus. For an elastic reaction, we determine the momentumof outgoing neutrons according to the data base. By the kinematics of this reaction, we can uniquelydetermine the momentum of the residual nucleus. We apply a similar method for the capture case. In thiscase we can uniquely determine the excitation enregy as well as the momentum of the residual nucleus.
We then apply the statistical decay process without neutron width. Finally, for (n,Nn’) reaction, we apply
a similar way as in the (n,n’) case, but after one nucleon emission, we apply the statistical decay processwith all decay channels. In this case, number of emitted neutrons is not always coincident with a number
indicated in the data base. But we have checked this discrepancy has very small effect. By these processes,
19

we can treat low energy neutron collisions as an ‖event‖ which means the energy and momentum areconserved in each event. Therefore, by this mode, we can extract any information, e.g. the kinetic energy
distribution of the residual nuclei, two-particle correlation, etc.
2.3.2 Microscopic approach for estimation of relative biological effectivenessCalculation of the probability density of deposition energies in microscopic sites, called as lineal
energy y or specific energy z, is of great importance in estimation of relative biological effectiveness(RBE) of charged particles. However, such microscopic probability densities cannot be directly calculated
by PHITS simulation using [T-Deposit] or [T-Heat] tallies, since PHITS is designed to simulate particle
motions in macroscopic scale, and employs a continuous-slowing-down approximation (CSDA) for
calculating the energy loss of charged particles. We therefore introduced a special tally named [T-SED]
for calculating the microscopic probability densities using a mathematical function that can
instantaneously calculate quantities around trajectories of charged particles. The function was developedon the basis of track structure simulation, considering productions of -rays and Auger electrons. Notethat the name of ―SED‖ derives from ―Specific Energy Distribution‖. Details of the calculation procedureare given elsewhere.2-21, 2-22)
Using this tally, we can get information of probability densities of y and z in water. We can also
calculate the probability densities in different materials, although the accuracy has not been checked yet.
Similar to [T-LET], the dose is only counted in an energy loss of charged particles and nuclei, and thus,
we must use the event generator mode (e-mode = 1) if we would like to transport low-energy neutrons.
The deposition energy in microscopic sites can be expressed by deposit energy  in MeV, lineal energy y
in keV/m or specific energy z in Gy. The definitions of these quantities are given in ICRU Report 362-23).
Usage of [T-SED] is similar to that of [T-LET].

20

3 Installation
PHITS is coded by the Fortran77. PHITS can be compiled by almost Fortran77 software on various
operation systems. We have already checked operations on the DEC, SUN, HP, AIX workstations, andPC, Windows, and Linux.
3.1 Source files and data files
The list of PHITS source and include files is shown as followings. These files should be put together
in a same directory.
List 3.1 ●Source files
mdp-uni.f mdp-win.f
mpi-non.f mpi-lin.f
usrsors.f anal-002.f
usrmgf1.f usrmgf3.f usrmgt1.f usrmgt2.f
usrelst1.f usrelst2.f usrdfn1.f usrdfn2.f
analyz.fnreac.f
read00.ftalls01.ftalls06.f
wrnt12.f
ggs01.f
ggm01.f
ggm06.f
ovly15.fcelimp.f
ovly12.f
read01.ftalls02.ftallsm1.f
wrnt13.f
ggs02.f
ggm02.f
ggm07.fdataup.f
ovly13.f
read02.ftalls03.ftallsm2.f
read03.f
ggs03.f
ggm03.f
ggm08.f

getflt.fpartrs.f
sors.ftalls04.ftallsm3.f
marscg.f
wrnt10.f
ggm04.fa-angel.f

magtrs.frange.ftalls00.ftalls05.f
update.f
ggs00.f
geocntl.f
ggm05.f
ovly14.f

main.fsdml.fjbook.fdklos.fgem.f
masdis.fncasc.f
nelst.f
nevap.f
gemset.f utl01.f
utl02.f
atima01.f atima02.f atima03.f

bert.futlnmtc.f
isobert.f
mars00.f

bertin.f
gamlib.f
isodat.fmars01.fbert-bl0.f bert-bl1.f bert-bl2.f
erupin.f erup.f
fissn.frandmc.f energy.f ndata01.f
mars02.f mars03.f mars04.f

jamin.f
jam.f
jamcross.f jampdf.fjambuu.f jamana.f
pysigh.fjamdat.f jamcoll.f jamdec.f
jamsoft.f jamhij.f jamhard.f
unix.fpyjet.fpythia.f

qmd00.fqmdcoll.f qmddflt.f qmdgrnd.f qmdinit.f
qmdmfld.f
utl03.fa-func.f a-utl00.f
a-main0.f a-main1.f a-hsect.f a-line.f

a-wtext.f

Only mdp-uni.f and mdp-win.f are OS dependent files in the above list. You have to specify which
file you use in a makefile. mdp-uni.f should be used on the UNIX system, and mdp-win.f on the Windows
system. These mdp-uni.f and mdp-win.f files are used in order to obtain a DATE, TIME, and CPU times
in the code. The mpi-non.f and mpi-lin.f are prepared for non-parallel and MPI parallel computation.
21

PHITS needs 14 include files as shown in followings
List 3.2 ●Include files
bert.incparam.inc
ggmparam.inc
atimacnt.inc

gamlib.inc
param00.inc
mmbank.inc
atimadim.inc

jam1.incparam01.inc
angel00.inc
atimasys.inc

jam2.incparam02.inc
angel01.inc

jam3.incggsparam.inc

A data file trxcrd.dat is necessary if you set an option of photon emission from residual nuclei. You
must put the trxcrd.dat file into a directory specified in your input.
3.2 Compiling PHITS code
In order to compile PHITS, you need to modify the makefile. Uncomment options suitable for yourenvironment. Then you can compile PHITS by the ―make‖ command.
List 3.3
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
-Bstatic
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:

●Makefile for PHITS#-----------------------------------------------------------------------##@(#)Makefile 2005/10/27##
Makefile for PHITS version 2.06##-----------------------------------------------------------------------#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# Linux pgf for parallel in PC cluster#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# TARGET = ../phits200p# F77= pgf77# FCFLAGS = -O4# INCLUDES = -I/usr/pgi/linux86/include# LIBES= -L/usr/pgi/linux86/lib -lfmpich -lmpich -Bstatic# OBJPARA = mpi-lin.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# Linux pgf for parallel in tare#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# TARGET = ../phits200p# F77= pgf77# FCFLAGS = -O4# INCLUDES = -I/usr/pgi/linux86/include# LIBES= -L/usr/pgi/linux86/lib -L/usr/local/mpich/lib -lfmpich -lmpich# OBJPARA = mpi-lin.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# Linux mpif77 for PC cluster B#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# TARGET = ../phits200p# F77= mpif77# FCFLAGS = -O4# INCLUDES =# LIBES= -Bstatic# OBJPARA = mpi-lin.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------22

37:
38:
39:
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
47:
48:
49:
50:
nousage
51:
52:
53:
54:
55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
60:
61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
67:
68:
69:
70:
71:
72:
73:
74:
75:
76:
77:
78:
79:
80:
81:
82:
83:
84:
85:
86:
87:
88:
89:
90:
91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:

# Linux pgf#-----------------------------------------------------------------------TARGET = ../phits200
F77= pgf77
FCFLAGS = -O4
INCLUDES =LIBES=OBJPARA = mpi-non.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# Dec Alpha#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# TARGET = ../phits200
# F77
= f77
# FCFLAGS = -g -O4 -align dcommons -convert big_endian -warn noalignments -warn# INCLUDES =# LIBES=# OBJPARA = mpi-non.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# HP#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# TARGET = ../phits200
# F77
= f77
# FCFLAGS = +DA1.1 +O0 +e +U77 +Onolimit# INCLUDES =# LIBES=# OBJPARA = mpi-non.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# Sun#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# TARGET = ../phits200
# F77
= f77
# FCFLAGS = -O
# INCLUDES =# LIBES=# OBJPARA = mpi-non.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# Linux g77#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# TARGET = ../phits200
# F77
= g77
# FCFLAGS = -O4 -fno-automatic# INCLUDES =# LIBES=# OBJPARA = mpi-non.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# Linux Intel Fortran#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# TARGET = ../phits200i# F77= ifort# FCFLAGS = -fast -noautomatic# INCLUDES =# LIBES
= -fast# OBJPARA = mpi-non.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# for machine dependent or user defined source and analysis#-----------------------------------------------------------------------OBJ1 = ¥yen
23

97:
98:
99:
100:
101:
102:
103:
104:
105:
106:
107:
108:
109:
110:
111:
112:
113:
114:
115:
116:
117:
118:
119:
120:
121:
122:
123:
124:
125:
126:
127:
128:
129:
130:
131:
132:
133:
134:
135:
136:
137:
138:
139:
140:
141:
142:
143:
144:
145:
146:
147:
148:
149:
150:
151:
152:
153:
154:
155:
156:
157:

usrsors.o
usrdfn1.o

usrmgf1.o usrmgf3.o anal-002.o mdp-uni.o ¥yen
usrdfn2.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------MAKE= Makefile
CC= cc
CCFLAGS = -O0#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# for param.inc#-----------------------------------------------------------------------OBJ2 = ¥yen
analyz.o celimp.o dataup.o getflt.onreac.oovly12.o ovly13.o partrs.o
read00.o read01.o read02.o sors.otalls01.o talls02.o talls03.o talls04.otalls06.o tallsm1.o tallsm2.o tallsm3.o
wrnt12.o wrnt13.o read03.o marscg.oggs01.oggs02.oggs03.owrnt10.o
ggm01.oggm02.oggm03.oggm04.oggm06.oggm07.oggm08.oa-angel.oovly15.o usrelst1.o usrelst2.o usrmgt1.o

magtrs.orange.otalls00.otalls05.oupdate.oggs00.ogeocntl.oggm05.oovly14.o
usrmgt2.o

¥yen
¥yen
¥yen
¥yen
¥yen
¥yen
¥yen
¥yen
¥yen

#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# for new package#-----------------------------------------------------------------------OBJ3 = ¥yen
main.odklos.osdml.ogem.ojbook.omasdis.oncasc.onelst.onevap.o¥yengemset.o utl01.o
utl02.o¥yen
atima01.o atima02.o atima03.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# for old package#-----------------------------------------------------------------------OBJ4 = ¥yen
bert.obertin.outlnmtc.o gamlib.o
isobert.o isodat.omars00.o mars01.o

bert-bl0.o bert-bl1.o bert-bl2.o ¥yen
erupin.o erup.ofissn.o¥yenrandmc.o energy.o ndata01.o ¥yen
mars02.o mars03.o mars04.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# for JAM#-----------------------------------------------------------------------OBJ5 = ¥yen
jamin.ojam.ojamcross.o jampdf.ojambuu.o jamana.opysigh.ojamdat.o jamcoll.o jamdec.o ¥yen
jamsoft.o jamhij.o jamhard.o ¥yen
unix.opyjet.opythia.o ¥yen#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# for JQMD#-----------------------------------------------------------------------OBJ6 = ¥yen
qmd00.oqmdcoll.o qmddflt.o qmdgrnd.o qmdinit.o
qmdmfld.o
24

¥yen

158:
159:
160:
161:
162:
163:
164:
165:
166:
167:
168:
169:
170:
171:
172:
173:
174:
175:
176:
177:
178:
179:
180:
181:
182:
183:
184:
185:

#-----------------------------------------------------------------------# for ANGEL except for utl03.f, a-func.f, a-utl00.f#-----------------------------------------------------------------------OBJ7 = ¥yen
utl03.oa-func.oa-main0.o a-main1.oa-utl00.o¥yena-hsect.o a-line.oa-wtext.o#-----------------------------------------------------------------------OBJS = ¥yen$(OBJ1) $(OBJ2) $(OBJ3) $(OBJ4) $(OBJ5) $(OBJ6) $(OBJ7) $(OBJPARA).f.o: :
: $(F77) $(FCFLAGS) $(INCLUDES) -c $*.f.c.o: :: $(CC) $(CCFLAGS) -c $*.c
all: :$(OBJS): $(F77) $(FCFLAGS) -o $(TARGET) $(OBJS) $(LIBES)$(OBJ2) : : param.inc$(OBJPARA): : param.inc$(OBJ7):: angel01.inc
clean: :: rm -f $(OBJS)

If you want to compile PHITS code for the MPI parallel computing, set OBJPARA = mpi-lin.o in themakefile, otherwise, OBJPARA = mpi-non.o. The MPI parallel computing for PHITS was checked its
operation on a PC cluster system by Linux pgf77. On other cluster systems the parallel computing is notsupported yet, however it may be built on the systems if MPI is installed, since the mpi-lin.f is written by
MPI common functions.
OBJ1 includes user definition files. usrsors.f is a user definition source routine, anal-002.f is a user
definition nuclear reaction analysis routine, usrmg1.f, usrmg3.f are sample programs for neutron magnetic
fields, usrdfn1.f, usrdfn2.f are sample routines for [t-deposit] and mdp-uni.f is a routine to obtain elapse
time for the UNIX system. Modify these options depending on your needs.
Routines listed in OBJ2 include the param.inc. Some important arrays are defined in the param.inc.
usrmgt1.f, usrmgt2.f are sample routines for time dependent magnetic fields, usrelst1.f, usrelst2.f aresample routines for elastic angular distribution of low energy neutrons. In the case that param.inc is
modified, only routines listed in OBJ2 are re-compiled automatically by the make command. It is notedthat the other include files are not linked with related routines in this makefile. OBJ3 contains newroutines such as the GEM. In OBJ4, OBJ5, and OBJ6, correspond to old routines, JAM routines, and
QMD routines respectively.
Source files related with the GG are read03.f, ggs00.f, ggs01.f, ggs02.f, and ggs03.f. Source files
related with the CG are marscg.f, mars00.f, mars01.f, mars02.f, mars03.f, and mars04.f. Source files forneutron transport part are ggm01.f, ggm02.f, ggm03.f, ggm04.f, ggm05.f, ggm06.f, and ggm07.f. Source
files for ANGEL part are a-angel.f, utl03.f, a-func.f, a-utl00.f, a-main0.f, a-main1.f, a-hsect.f, a-line.f, anda-wtext.f.

25

3.3 Compiling ANGELANGEL is included in the PHITS sources, in other word, ANGEL is installed automatically in
PHITS. But you will need a stand-alone ANGEL for off line plotting. You can compile the stand-alone
ANGEL easily using the ―make.ang‖ file, which is included in the PHITS source files.
List 3.4 ●Makefile for ANGEL
1: #-----------------------------------------------------------------------2: #3: #@(#)Makefile 2005/10/01
4: #
5: #
Makefile for ANGEL
6: #7: #-----------------------------------------------------------------------8: ##### sors #####
9: #-----------------------------------------------------------------------10:
11: OBJ1 = ¥yen
12:
a-alone.o13:
14: OBJ2 = ¥yen
15:
a-main1.o a-hsect.o a-line.o a-func.o a-utl00.o ¥yen
16:
a-main0.o a-wtext.o mdp-uni.o
17:
18: #-----------------------------------------------------------------------19: ##### set executable file name #####
20: #-----------------------------------------------------------------------21:
22: TERGET = ../../utl/angel400
23:
24: #-----------------------------------------------------------------------25: ##### set compile options #####
26: #-----------------------------------------------------------------------27: #Alpha
28: # FFLAGS = -O4 -warn noalignments -warn nousage
29: # FC = f77
30: #-----------------------------------------------------------------------31: #Linux pgf
32:
FFLAGS = -O4
33:
FC = pgf77
34: #-----------------------------------------------------------------------35: #Linux g77
36: # FFLAGS = -O4 -fno-automatic
37: # FC = g77
38: #-----------------------------------------------------------------------39: #Sun
40: # FFLAGS = -O
41: # FC = f90
42: #-----------------------------------------------------------------------43: #HP
44: # FFLAGS = +DA1.1 +O0 +e +U77 +Onolimit
45: # FC = f77
46: #-----------------------------------------------------------------------47: #Absoft ProFortran on MacOSX
48: ##FFLAGS = -N27 -N15 -N11 -s
49: ##LDFLAGS = -L/Absoft/lib -lU77 -lV77
50: ##FC = f77
51: # FFLAGS = -O2 -N11 -s
52: # LDFLAGS = -L/Absoft/lib -lU77 -lV77
26

53:
54:
55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
60:
61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
67:
68:
69:
70:
71:
72:
73:
74:

# FC = f90#-----------------------------------------------------------------------MAKE
CC
CFLAGS= Makefile
= cc
= -O0

OBJS = $(OBJ1) $(OBJ2)
.f.o
.c.o
all

:
$(FC) $(FFLAGS) -c $*.f:$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -c $*.c:$(OBJS)$(FC) -o $(TERGET) $(OBJS)$(OBJ1) : angel00.inc$(OBJ2) : angel01.inc
clean:
rm -f $(OBJS)

3.4 Executable file
PHITS can be executed on the UNIX system by the following command,
List 3.5 ● command line to execute PHITS
phits100 < input.dat > output.dat
This command can not be used on theWindows system. You can use instead another method. Prepare
a file (in this case, let name phits.in ) written by following format.
List 3.6 ● the first line of the standard input
file = input.file
Then you can run PHITS byphits100 < phits.in > output.dat
By the command, PHITS open the input.file and read the input information. This method can be usedon the other systems including the UNIX.
If you run PHITS code by the parallel computing, the method shown in List 3.5 can not be used evenon the UNIX system. Instead you can use the List 3.6 method on the parallel calculation. In addition,
PHITS is forced to read the input file named phits.in on the parallel computing.
3.5 Terminating PHITS code
Once PHITS is executed, it creates the batch.now file. The batch.now file contains an elapse
information after every batch. It also contains each PE status on the parallel calculation. You can check if
PE abort occurred in batch.now.
27

The first line of the batch.now is written as
1 <--- 1:continue, 0:stop
If you change the value ―1‖ into ―0‖, the calculation will be terminated and the summary and results
are provided for the events until terminated. It is an useful function shown in below.
Associated with batch.now, a new parameter was included by the parameter section. You can specify
it as
itall = 2 # (D=0) 0:no tally at batch, 1:same, 2:different
If you set itall = 1, PHITS outputs the latest results (tally output) after every batch. On theparallel calculation, results are created by every batch × ( PE - 1 ). In the case of itall = 1, the results are
overwritten in the same files. On the other case of itall = 2, the results after every batch are written indifferent named file. Results are named by user specified name + batch number. The final results are
written in the user specified file.
By using this functions, you can terminate a PHITS calculation at any time with checking the latest
result. Also you can monitor the latest results with graphical plot automatically made by the PHITS (Seesection 5.7.15).
3.6 Array sizes
You should check and modify the array sizes described in the param.inc file. The ―mdas‖ is the mostimportant variable. It specifies the total size of arrays for geometry, tally output, nuclear data, and bank.
You can find out the current use in a input echo (corresponds ―output.dat‖ in previous example).
The bank size can be set in the parameter section. If the bank becomes full, odd arrays in mdas areused. The default param.inc is shown below.
List 3.7 ● param.inc
1: ************************************************************************
2: *
*
3: *
'param.inc'*
4: **5: ************************************************************************
6:
7:
parameter ( mdas =20000000 )8:parameter ( kvlmax =3000 )
9:parameter ( kvmmax = 10000 )10:parameter ( itlmax =40 )11:parameter ( inevt =70 )12:parameter ( latmax = 2000000 )13:
14:common /mdasa/ das( mdas )15:
common /mdasb/ mmmax
16:
17: *----------------------------------------------------------------------*
18: *
*
19: *
mdas : total memory * 8 = byte*
20: *mmmax : maximum number of total array
*
21: *
*
22: *
kvlmax : maximum number of regions, cell and material*
23: *kvmmax : maximum number of id for regions, cel and material
*
24: *
*
28

25:
26:
27:
28:
29:

*
itlmax : number of maximum tally entry**
inevt : number of collision type for summary**
latmax : maximum number of lattice in a cell****----------------------------------------------------------------------*

29

4 Input FilePHITS input consists of some sections as listed in Table 4-1 and 4-2. Each section begins from a[Section Name]. You can put maximum 4 blanks between the line head and the declaration of [ SectionName], otherwise (more than 5 blanks) [ Section Name] is not be recognized as a beginning of a section.
4.1 Sections
Table 4-1 and 4-2 shows the various sections used in PHITS.
Table 4-1: Sections(1)namedescription[Title]Title[Parameters]

Various type of parameters[Source]

Source definition[Material]

Material definition[Body]

CG body definition[Region]Region definition by CG[Surface]

Surface definition by GG[Cell]

Cell definition by GG[Transform]

Definition the coordinate transform of GG surface[Importance]

Region importance definition[Weight window]

Weight window definition[Volume]Region volume definition[Temperature]

Cell temperature definition[Brems bias]

Bremsstrahlung bias definition[Photon weight]

Photon product weight definition[Forced collisions]

Forced collision definition[Magnetic field]

Magnetic field definition[Counter]Counter definition[Reg name]Region name definition for graphical plot

[Mat name color]

Material name and color definition for graphical plot

[Mat time change]

time dependent material definition[Super mirror]

super mirror definition[Elastic option]

elastic option definition[Timer]timer definition

Table 4-2: Sections(2)
30

name

description[T-Track]

Track length tally definition[T-Cross]

Surface crossing tally definition[T-Yield]

Residual nuclei yield tally definition[T-Heat]Heat developing tally definition[T-Time]Time tally definition[T-Star]Star density tally definition[T-Dpa]DPA tally definition[T-Product]

Fragments tally definition[T-Gshow]

Region surface display definition for graphical plot

[T-Rshow]Physical quantity region display definition for graphical plot

[T-3dshow]

3D graphical geometry plot definition[T-LET]LET tally definition[T-Deposit]

Deposit tally definition[T-Deposit2]

Deposit2 tally definition[T-SED]

SED tally definition[End]

End of input file

It is noted that PHITS does not read any input informations which are written below the [end]section.
4.2 Reading control(1) Uppercase, lowercase, blank
Discrimination between lowercase and uppercase characters is not performed in the PHITS input
except for file names. Blanks at line head and end are taken no account except for the declaration of the[SectionName ] as described before.
(2) TabA tab is replaced into 8 blanks(3) Line Connecting
If you add ― n ‖ at line end, the next line is considered to be a continuing line. You can use multiplelines to write input data by the ― n ‖ connecting.
But you donot need to use the ― n ‖ connecting in the def of [body] and the def of [region]. In thesearea, line is connected automatically without any symbol. This function can be also used in the [cell] and[surface] sections but in these case, more than 5 blanks are required at the line head of connected line.
Details of this function are explained later.

31

(4) Line connecting
Short lines can be placed in a line by dividing them ― ; ‖ as
idbg = 0 ; ibod = 1 ; naz = 0
But this function is not available where the format is defined such as in the mesh description.
(5) Comment marks
You can use the following comment marks ―#‖, ―%‖, ―!‖, ―$‖. The comment out is effective from thecomment mark to the line end. You can also use ―c‖ as a comment mark if you put ―c‖ in the first 5
columns at line head with blanks as ―c ‖. In the [cell] and [surface] sections, ―#‖ is used for celldefinitions, so only ―$‖ is available as the comment mark in these [cell] and [surface] sections.
(6) Blank lines
Blank lines, and lines which begins from a comment mark are skipped.
(7) Section reading skip
If you add ―off‖ after a section name as ―[ Section Name] off‖ the section is skipped (is not read). As
described later, you can write any comments after ―[Body]‖ section name as ―[Body] HIMAC
experiment‖. But you can not use comments which begins with ―off‖ here, if not, the [Body] section isskipped.
(8) Skip in sections
You can skip from any places in sections by putting ―qp:‖ at the line head. Lines from ―qp:‖ to theend of the section are skipped.
(9) Skip all―q:‖ can be used as a terminator of a input file. It works same as the [End].
4.3 Inserting files
You can include other files in any place by
infl: {file.name} [n1 - n2]
You should specifya name of a file to be inserted in {}, and the number of lines from n1 to n2 of thatfile in [ ]. If there is no [ ], PHITS includes all lines of the specified file. You can use following style tospecify line numbers,[ n1- ]
[ -n2 ]
From line number n1 to the end, and from top to line number n2 respectively. The file insertion can benested more than once.
32

4.4 User definition constants
You can set your own constant as
set: c1[52.3] c2[2 * pi] c3[ c1 * 1.e-8]
This ―set‖ definition can be written in anywhere. Defined user-constants can be used as numericalvalues in your input file. User-constants can be re-defined any times, and these values is kept until
re-defined. In the 3rd case of above example ―c3‖, another user-constant ―c1‖ is called in a user-constantdefinition. In the case, the value in which the user-constant c1 keeps at that time, is used. So even if you
re-define the c1 below the ―c3‖ definition, the value of ―c3‖ defined here is not changed. ―pi‖ is set to 
by default.
4.5 Using mathematical expressions
Mathematical expressions can be used in your input file. It is the Fortran style. Available functions
are shown in Table 3.
Table 4-3: Intrinsic Function.
Intrinsic Function
FLOAT

INT

ABS

EXP

LOG

LOG10 MAX

MIN

MOD

NINT

SIGN

SQRT

ACOS

ASIN

ATAN2

COS

COSH

SIN

SINH

TAN

TANH

ATAN

For example,
param = c1 * 3.5 * sin( 55 * pi / 180 )As above example as a single numerical value is expected after param =, you can put blanks in theexpressions. However it is not allowed that multiple numerical values are aligned, such as in the [Body]
and [Region] sections. In such region, you can close the expressions using {}, like { c1 * 2 / pi }.
4.6 Using the CG or GG
You have to choose between the CG system and the GG system in order to describe a geometry of
calculation. When you choose the CG, you must use the [Region] and [Body] sections. Or GG, you must
use the [Cell], [Surface] and [transform] sections.
You can not call both CG and GG systems at the same time. You can use the section-off feature as―[Region] off‖, if CG and GG descriptions exist together in a input file.
4.7 Particle identification
Available particles in PHITS are identified as in Table 4-4. These particles can be specified by the33

symbol or the kf-code. The particles which is not specified the symbol in Table 4-4, are specified by only
kf-code.
The other particles identified as type 11 can be defined by the kf-code as shown in followings, andthese decay-channels and life-times are also shown in below.
By adopting the QMD code, nucleus can be treated in PHITS. The writing form of nuclide is as 208Pb,
56

Fe. The writing style Pb, Fe, etc., means all isotopes (This can not be used as projectile). Nucleus can be

described by kf=Z * 1000000 + A for the kf-code.
In the previous version of PHITS, the photon was called ―gamma‖ but it is called ―photon‖ in the
newer version.

34

Table 4-4: List of the transport particles.
ityp

symbolkf-codeparticle name1

proton2212

proton2neutron2112

neutron

3

pion+

211

+

4

pion0

111

0

5

pion-

-211

-

6

muon+

-13

+

7

muon-

13

-

8

kaon+

321

K+

9

kaon0

311

K0

10

kaon-

-321

K-

11

other

below

other particle

12electron

11

e-

13

positron

-11

e+

14

photon22

15

deuteron

1000002

deuteron16

triton1000003

triton173he2000003

3

18

alpha

2000004

19

nucleus

Z*1000000+A

11

-

+-12

He


nucleus e e

11

-

+-14

  

11

-

-2212

p

11

-

-2112

n

11

-

-311

11

-

+-221

11

-

331

11

-

+-312211-+-322211-+-321211-+-311211-+-332211-+-331211-+-3334

35

K0


'

0 0
  
0  0  
0 0   

Table 4-5: Decay channel and life time
blanking fraction
0 ➝  + life time (sec)

100%

0

+ ➝  + 

100%

2.6029e-8100%2.6029e-8

+ ➝ e+ +  ＋ 100%

2.19703e-6

－ ➝ e－ + － ＋ 100%

2.19703e-6

68.61%

8.922e-11



－

➝ 

－

＋ 
－

e

0



e

➝  +－➝  + 031.39%

➝ +

other

+ ➝  + －

65.31%➝  +

other

➝ 

+ 

65.31%➝  + －

other

－

－



 ➝ +

38.9%

➝  + 0 + 0➝  +

23.7%➝  + － + 

other





‘ ➝  + 

+ 

－



➝  + 0 + 

➝  +

+

－

44.1%

0

0

20.5%
30.1%

➝ +
0

1.2371e-8

31.9%

+ 0

－

1.2371e-8

other

➝ p+

64.1%

➝ n + 0other+ ➝ p + 0

51.57%n + +other 0 ➝ 0 + 

100%

0

－ ➝ n + －

100%

1.479e-100➝0 + 0100%

2.90e-10➝ 0 + 

100%

1.639e-10

67.8%

8.22e-11

－

➝

－

－



－ ➝  + K－


－

－

+ 0

➝  +
➝ 

23.6%
other

36

2.631e-10
7.99e-11

5 Sections format
5.1 [ T i t l e ] section
In the section, you can define a title of your calculation. Any numbers of title lines are allowed.
Blank lines are skipped in this section.
[Title]This is a test calculation of PHITS.
Any number of title lines are allowed.
..........
5.2 [ P a r a m e t e r s ] section
The various parameters of PHITS can be defined in this section. The format is as below.
[Parameters]
para1 = number | file.namepara2 = number | file.name..........
You can change the order of parameters. Each parameter has the default value. So undefinedparameters use the default values.
Parameters and default values are shown in followings. (D= ) means the default value.
5.2.1 Calculation mode
Table 5-1: parameter 1
parameter
icntl

value
(D=0)
=0
=1
=2
=3
=4
=5
=6
=7
=8
=9
= 10
= 11
= 12

explanation
basic control option
normal PHITS calculation
nuclear reaction calculation, (under development)
output a CGVIEW input file
output only input echo for checking memory usage, and library, and file links
output a MARS-PF input file
no reaction, no ionization. all regions are made be void for geometry check,and volume and area calculations
source check, source particles can be tallied by [t-product]
execute [t-gshow] tally (graphical output)
geometry output of xyz mesh tally with gshow option (graphical output)
execute [t-rshow] tally (graphical output)
geometry output of reg mesh tally with rshow option (graphical output)
execute [t-3dshow] tally (graphical output)
re-calculte from dumpall file, dumpall file is specified by file(15)The function of nuclear reaction calculation specified as icntl=1 is under development.
By icntl=12, PHITS re-calculate whole transport by reading the information from dumpall file,which is created by dumpall=1 option. The re-calculation can describe whole transport events which was37calculated before. One needs the same input file as used in the previous calculation. maxcas and maxbch
cannot be changed, but are read from the file. It is very powful when you want to calculate different tallies
which is not used in the previous calculation. However, please be careful that the calculation with
dumpall=1 may create huge dumpall file. This option is only available for GG geometry.
5.2.2 Number of history and bank
Table 5-2: parameter 2parameter

value

Explanation

irskip(D=0)

random number control

irskip>0

begin calculation after skipping events by number of irskip (for debug)

irskip<0

begin calculation after skipping random numbers by number of irskip (formanual parallel computing)rseed(D=0.0)initial random number option

rseed<0

get a initial random number from starting time.

rseed=06647299061401 (default)

rseed>0

use rseed as initial seed of random number

maxcas(D=10)

number of event per 1 batch

maxbch(D=10)

number of batch

maxbnk(D=10000)

size of bank array

In the PHITS parallel calculation, number of batch should be an integer multiple of (all number ofPE -1). If not, PHITS converts automatically the batch number as it becomes an integer multiple and as
the total number of event becomes almost same with given events. In this case, some comments are
outputted at the end of an input echo.
5.2.3 Cut off energy and switching energy
Table 5-3: parameter 3
parametervalue

explanationemin(1)(D=1.0)

proton cut off energy (MeV)

emin(2)(D=1.0)neutron cut off energy (MeV)

emin(i)(D=1.0)cut off energy for i-th particle (MeV)i = 3-10(i; particle id, see Table 4)emin(11)(D=2.0)cut off energy for others (MeV)

emin(i)(D=1.e+9)

cut off energy for i-th particle (MeV)i = 12-19(i; particle id, see Table 4)38

parametervalue

explanationi = 15-19

i = 15-19 energy unit is [MeV/nucleon]esmin(D=0.001)

minimum energy for range calculation for the charge particles (MeV)

esmax(D=300000)

maximum energy for range calculation for the charge particles (MeV)

cmin(i)(D=emin(i))

nuclear reaction cut off energy for i-th particle (MeV)
any nuclear reactions under cmin(i) are not treatedi = 15-19

for these nucleus, energy unit is [MeV/nucleon]dmax(i)(D=emin(i))

maximum energy of library use for i-th particle

ejamnu(D=3500.)

switching energy of nucleon nucleus reaction calculation from Bertini (orQMD) to JAM model (MeV)

ejampi(D=2500.)

switching energy of pion nucleus reaction calculation from Bertini to JAM
model (MeV)

eisobar(D=0.0)maximum energy (MeV) of isobar calculation when isobar is defined(isobar=1)

eqmdnu(D=3500.)

switching energy of nucleon nucleus reaction calculation from Bertini to
QMD model (MeV)

eqmdmin(D=10.0)

minimum energy of QMD calculation [MeV/nucleon]

ejamqmd(D=3500.0)

switching energy from JQMD to JAMQMD [MeV/nucleon]

PHITS uses libraries in the energy region emin < energy < dmax. If you set emin > dmax, anylibraries are not used. The maximum energies for proton, neutron, photon, and electron are 150 MeV, 150
MeV, 100GeV, and 1000 MeV respectively in this version.
We create the range table of charge particles in esmin < energy < esmax. if you want to use muchlarger energy, you should set esmax.
Below eqmdmin, we do not consider the nuclear reactions of d; t; , and nucleus. Since theapplicability of QMD is restricted in low energy region and the range of nucleus is very short in thenormal material, one do not need consider the low energy reactions of nucleus for usual case. High energy
heavy ion collions are treated by JAMQMD above 3.5GeV/u in default. This switching energy can bechanged by e jamqmd. Even for neuclon induced collisions, you can calculate the collisions by JAMQMD
by changing eqmdnu; e jamnu and e jamqmd.

39

5.2.4 Cut off time, cut off weight, and weight window
Table 5-4: parameter 4
parametervalue

explanationtmax(i)(D=1.e+9)

cut off time for i-th particle (nsec)

i = 1-20(i; particle id, see Table 4)

wc1(i)(D=-0.5)

iminimum weight for i-th particle

wc2(i)(D=wc1/2)

cutoff weight for i-th particle

swtm(i)(D=1.0)minimum source weight for i-th particle

wupn

(D=5)

maximum value of weight window= minimum value in [Weight Window] section x wupn
wupn > 2

wsurvn(0.6*wupn)

survival weight value
1 < wsurvn < wupn

mxspln(D=5)

maximum number of split, maximum multiple number of survival
mxslpn > 1

mwhere(D=0)

where the weight window takes place-1: at nuclear reaction, 0:both, 1: at region crossing

Cut off time should be specified as tmax(i) [nsec] for each particle. After elapsing the cut off time,
the particle is killed. It is not effective to results for high energy particle transport, but it is useful for low
energy particle transport calculation.
Weight of a particle is changed by the importance, forced collisions, implicit captures, and weightwindow functions. When the weight takes lower value than user-defined weight cut off, the particle isjudged if it is killed or not by the Russian roulette method. This function is not available for particles
defined in the weight window.
In the Russian roulette method, when the weight WGT is lower than the product of WC2 and ratio Rof two importances between at source point and at current point, WC2 × R (i.e., when WGT < WC2 × R),
the particle survives with a probability, WGT=(WC1×R), which is a function of own weight WGT. Thenthe weight is changed as WGT = WC1× R. Unless, the particle is killed. If the WC1 and WC2 are given as
negative, |WC1| × SWTM and |WC2| × SWTM are set as WC1 and WC2.
If there are any particles and regions which are not set importance, these importances are set as 1.

40

5.2.5 Model option (1)Table 5-5: parameter 5parameter

value

Explanation

ielas

(D=2)

elastic scattering option=0

exclude elastic scatter=1

include neutron elastic scatter=2

include neutron and proton elastic scatter

ielms(D=100)

number of angle group for elastic scattering

inmed

(D=1)

nucleon-nucleon cross section options for Bertini model=0

free (nmtclb25.dat)=1

Cugnon old (nmtclb95.dat)=2

Cugnon new (nmtclb30.dat)(D=3)

options for Evaporation model=0

without evaporation model=1

using DRES model=2

using SDM model=3

using GEM model(D=0)

decay option for residual nuclei=0

without  decay=1with  decay; file(14) is required. file(14)=trxcrd.dat(D=0)

options for isobar model=0

without isobar=1with isobar(D=0)

options for pre-equilibrium model (when nevap=1)=0

without pre-equilibrium model=1with pre-equilibrium model(D=0)

options for electron and positron transport=0

no slowing down, no reaction, in the energy region above dmax(12)=1make e=dmax(12), and weight=e/dmax(12) in the energy region above

nevap

igammaisobaripreeqieleh

dmax(12)
It is noted that inmed=1 is the default value.

415.2.6 Model option (2)Table 5-6: parameter 6
parameter

value

Explanation

level

(D=3)

level density option when nevap=1

=0

8/A

=1

with Baba’s parameters=2with Igunatyuk’s parameters(D=0)

treatment of minus charged decay particles below cut off energy=0make absorbed by force=1

make decayed(D=0)

Magnetic field=0

without Magnetic field=1

with Magnetic field(D=0)

 angular distribution for Bertini=050% isotropic, 50% forward=1

all isotropic=2

all forward

gravx

(D=0)

x-component of gravity direction

gravy

(D=0)

y-component of gravity direction

gravz

(D=0)

z-component of gravity direction

icrhi

(D=1)

option for total cross section for Nucleus-Nucleus collision=0

Shen formula=1

NASA formulanpidk

imagnfandit

If a particle, which has decay channel, takes lower energy than cut off, the particle decays
completely. In such decay particles, minus charged particles with nspred = 0 are forced to take reaction
for the purpose of forced absorption. If it is not absorbed, then the particle is made decayed.
―gravx‖, ―gravy‖, ―gravz‖ represent directions of gravity. The gravity force acts on neutrons below 1
eV. For an example, for ―gravx=1‖, ―gravy=0‖, ―gravz=0‖ case, the direction of the gravity is negative
direction of x-axis. gravx (D=0) icrhi (D=1)

42

5.2.7 Model option (3)Table 5-7: parameter 7
parametervalue

explanation

ndedx

(D=2)

option for dE/dx of charged particle and nucleus=0

SPAR for nucleus, NMTC for the others=1

ATIMA for nucleus and proton, NMTC for the others=2

SPAR for nucleus, proton, pion, and muon, NMTC for the others(D=-1)

Water (only for H2O) Ionization Potential option for ATIMA<0default, 75 eV>0

Ionization Potential for water(eV)(D=0)

option for Coulomb diffusion (angel straggling)=0

without Coulomb diffusion=1

with original Coulomb diffusion=2

with Moliere First Coulomb diffusion

ih2onspred=3
nedispe-modeusrmgtusrelst= 10

with Coulomb diffusion for ATIMA(D=0)

energy straggling option for charged particle and nucleus=0

without energy straggling=1

with Landau Vavilov energy straggling= 10

with energy straggling for ATIMA(D=0)

option for event generator mode=0

normal mode=1

= 1 event generator mode, file(14) = trxcrd.dat is required(D=1)

option for user subroutine of time dependent magnetic field=1

usrmgt1.f is used, which includes Wobbler magnet.

=2

usrmgt2.f is used, which includes Pulse magnet.

(D=1)

option for [elastic option]=1

usrelst1.f is used, which is for Bragg scattering=2

usrelst2.f is used, which is a sample program

It should be noted that the default option for ndedx was ―ndedx=0‖ before PHITS ver.2.00.
The option for ATIMA is under development, and it takes very long cpu time to calculate.

43

5.2.8 Output options (1)Table 5-8: parameter 8
parameter

value

Explanation

incut

(D=0)

neutron output options below cut off=0

no output=1

output in the ncut file specified as file(12)=2output in file(12) with time information(D=0)

-ray and electron output options below cut off=0

no output=1

output -ray data in the gcut file specified as file(13)=2output -ray in file(13) with time information=3

output -ray, electron, and positron data in file(13)(D=0)

proton output options below cut off=0

no output=1

output in the pcut file specified as file(10)=2output in file(10) with time information(D=0)

ncut file name options in the parallel calculation=0/wk/uname/file-name of file(12)=1/wk/uname/file-name of file(12)+(PE number)=2

file-name of file(12)=3file-name of file(12)+(PE number)(D=0)

gcut file name options in the parallel calculation=0/wk/uname/file-name of file(13)=1/wk/uname/file-name of file(13)+(PE number)=2

file-name of file(13)=3file-name of file(13)+(PE number)(D=0)

pcut file name options=0/wk/uname/file-name of file(10)=1/wk/uname/file-name of file(10)+(PE number)=2

file-name of file(10)=3file-name of file(10)+(PE number)/wk/uname//wk/uname/ /wk/ is the default directory name

igcut

ipcut

inparaigparaipparauname is a user-name read in from environment variable LOGNAME
It is noted that the default of ―incut‖ and ―igcut‖ were changed to be 0.

44

5.2.9 Output option (2)Table 5-9: parameter 9
parametervalue

explanation

itall

(D=0)

options for tally output after every batch=0

no output=1

in same file=2

in different files
file name = specified file name + batch number

itstep

imout

jmout

kmout

matadd(D=0)

option for timing of tally for changing field, like magnetic field=0

tally at reaction or surface cross (normal)=1tally at each step of the transport(D=0)

option of material representation in [material] section=0like, mat[12], 208Pb.33c=1

like, mat[12], Pb-208.33c=2like, m12, 82208.33c(D=0)

option of material density representation in [material] section=0

no conversion=1

converting particle density(D=0)

option of nuclear data information=0

no display=1

writing in input echo

(D=1)

treatment of different densities in same material in GG=0same material number=1

using new material number

Normally, the tallies are called at the reaction point or at the surface crossing. Thus the particle trackin the magnetic field, for an example, is shown as a straight line between collisions or between one
collision and surface crossing. If you specify ―itstep = 1‖, the trajectory is described correctly as a curve.
The maximum step for the magnetic field is set by ―deltm‖.

45

5.2.10 Output option (3)Table 5-10: parameter 10
parameter

value

Explanation

iggcm

(D=0)

option of GG warnings=0

no echo=1

in input echo

(D=0)

ivout (D=0) volume display options in the input echo=0in [volume] section=1

in [region] section(D=1)

importance display options in the input echo

ivout

ipout

(D=0 for GG)=0in [importance] section=1

in [region] section
this function is only available when all particles are set for the same
importance value

icput

ipara

nwsors(D=0)

CPU time count options=0

without count=1with count(D=0)

parameter display options=0

only described parameters=1

all parameters(D=0)

write down the information of nwsors source particles on file(6)CPU time counting is not available by default for saving calculation time. If you want to know CPU
time for each process, set ―icput=1‖.
If you set ―ipara=1‖, you can confirm all parameters in PHITS.

46

5.2.11 Output option (4)Table 5-11: parameter 11
parameter

value

Explanation

dumpall(D=0)

dumpall option=0

no dump=1

write down all information on file(15)(D=3)

dumpall file name option in the parallel calculation=0/wk/uname/file-name of file(15)=1/wk/uname/file-name of file(15)+(PE number)=2

file-name of file(15)=3file-name of file(15)+(PE number)/wk/uname//wk/ is the default directory nameidparaBy ―icntl=12‖, PHITS re-calculate whole transport by reading the information from dumpall file,which is created by ―dumpall=1‖ option. The re-calculation can describe whole transport events which
was calculated before. One needs the same input file as used in the previous calculation. ―maxcas‖ and―maxbch‖ cannot be changed, but are read from the file. It is very powful when you want to calculatedifferent tallies which is not used in the previous calculation. However, please be careful that thecalculation with ―dumpall=1‖ may create huge dumpall file. This option is only available for GG
geometry.

47

5.2.12 About geometrical errors
Table 5-12: parameter 12parametervalue

explanation

nlost(D=10)

acceptable value against lost particle (per 1 PE)

igerr

(D=1)

number of recovery for region error

igchk

(D=0)

no region check
check region setting flight mesh to deltb after region-crossing

deltb(D=1.e-5)

flight mesh (cm) after region-crossing with igchk=1
It is also a distance from a region boundary where particle is created by
the importance, and the forced collisiondeltm(D=20.12345)

maximum flight mesh (cm)deltc

(D=2.012345)

max flight mesh (cm) for charged particle with nedisp=1

delt0(D=0.1)minimum value of flight mesh (cm) by nspred and imagnf

deltg(D=1.0)maximum flight mesh (cm) for magnetic fielddeltt(D=1.0)max flight time (msec) for time dependent magnetic field

5.2.13 Input-output file name
Table 5-13: parameter 13
parametervalue

explanation

file(2)(D=cgview.in)

CGVIEW input file name when icntl=2

file(3)(D=cgview.set)

CGVIEW setup file name when icntl=2
This file becomes CGVIEW setup

file(4)(D=marspf.in)

MARS-PF input file name when icntl=4

file(6)(D=phits.out)

Summary output file name, If not specified, standard output

file(7)(D=xsdir)cross section directory file namefile(11)(D=nuclcal.out)

nuclear reaction output file namefile(12)(D=fort.12)

cut off neutron output file namefile(13)(D=fort.13)

cut off -ray output file namefile(10)(D=fort.10)

cut off proton output file namefile(14)(D=trxcrd.dat)

decay data file name when igamma=1, path name+trxcrd.dat isrequiredfile(15)(D=dumpall.dat)

dump file name for dumpall=1 option―file(7)‖ must be written with full pathname.

48

5.2.14 Others
Table 5-14: parameter 14
parameter

value

Explanation

inucr

(D=1)

nuclear reaction options=1

double differential cross section calculation=2

total, elastic, nonelastic cross section output=3

nonelastic cross section calculation=4

angular distribution of elastic scattering=5

pp, np, -p cross section output=6

pp, np, -p, cross section calculation

idam(i)

integeruser defined integer variablerdam(i)real*8user defined real variable

i = 1 - 100

These values can be used in the PHITS code by common /userp/
idam(100), rdam(100)

Nuclear reaction calculation mode by ―icntl=1‖ is under development at present.
5.2.15 Physical parameters for low energy neutron
The following parameters correspond to PHYS (Energy Physics Cutoff Card) for neutron less than
20 MeV.
Table 5-15: parameter 15
parametervalue

explanationemcnf(D=0.0)emcnf (D=0.0) threshold energy for neutron capture (MeV)
implicit capture is considered above this energyanalog capture isconsidered below this energy

iunr

(D=0)

fixed 0 at present

dnb(D=-1)

number of delayed neutron by fission=-1

natural sampling=0

no delayed neutron>0

number of neutrons495.2.16 Physical parameters for photon
The following parameters correspond to PHYS (Energy Physics Cutoff Card) for photon.
Table 5-16: parameter 16
parameter

value

Explanationemcpf(D=100)maximum energy for the detail model for photon (MeV)

ides

(D=0)

electron creation options by photon=0create electron or brems.photon=1

not create electron(D=0)

coherent scattering options for photon=0with coherent scattering=1

without coherent scattering(D=0)

option of photonuclear reaction=0

without photonuclear reaction=1

with analog photonuclear reaction=-1

with biased photonuclear reaction

nocoh

pnint

Notice that ―pnint‖ mode is under development.

50

5.2.17 Physical parameters for electron
The following parameters correspond to PHYS (Energy Physics Cutoff Card) for electron.
Table 5-17: parameter 17
parameter

value

Explanation

iphot

(D=0)

photon creation options by electron=0

create photon=1

not create photon(D=0)

angular distribution option for brems.

=0

full brems. tabular angular distribution=1

simple brems. angular distribution approximation(D=0)

straggling=0

sampled straggling for electron energy loss

=1

expected-value straggling for electron energy loss

(D=0)

brems. photon=0

not create brems. photon>0

number of analog brems. Photons(D=1)

x-ray photon=0

not create x-ray photon>0

number of analog x-ray photons(D=1)

secondary electron=0

not create secondary electron>0

number of analog secondary electrons(D=0)

brems. process=0

nominal brems. production>0

produce brems. on each substep

ibad

istrg

bnum

xnum

enum

numb

5.2.18 Dumpall option
By ―icntl=12‖, PHITS re-calculate whole transport by reading the information from dumpall file,which is created by ―dumpall=1‖ option. The re-calculation can describe whole transport events which
was calculated before. One needs the same input file as used in the previous calculation. ―maxcas‖ and―maxbch‖ cannot be changed, but are read from the file. It is very powful when you want to calculatedifferent tallies which is not used in the previous calculation. However, please be careful that thecalculation with ―dumpall=1‖ may create huge dumpall file. This option is only available for the GG
geometry.
The data is written on the dumpall file in binary. The data sequence and meaning are given in thefollowing.parameter value explanation

51

(1) NCOL
NCOL is an intrinsic variable in the program and denotes identification of process.
NCOL
1 :
2 :
3 :
4 :
5 :
6 :
7 :
8 :
9 :
10 :
11 :
12 :
13 :
14 :
15 :

start of calculation
end of calculation
end of a batchsourcedetection of geometry error
recovery of geometry error
termination by geometry error
termination by weight cut-off
termination by time cut-off
geometry boundary crossing
termination by energy cut-off
termination by escape or leakage(n,x) reaction(n,n'x) reaction
sequential transport only for tally

When ―NCOL=1, 2, 3‖, the output is finished. The followings are for ―NCOL>4‖.
(2) NOCAS, NOBCH, RCASC, RSOUIN
These four data are written only for ―NCOL=4‖ and their meaning are
NOCAS: current event number in this batch

NOBCH: current batch number

RCASC: real number of NOCAS+maxcas*(NOBCH-1)

RSOUIN: sum of the weight of source particle(3) NO, MAT, ITYP, KTYP, JTYP, MTYP, RTYP, OLDWT
These meanNO

: cascade id in this event

MAT: material id

ITYP: particle type

KTYP

: particle kf-code

JTYP: charge number of the particle

MTYP: baryon number of the particle

RTYP: rest mass of the particle (MeV)

OLDWT: wight of the particle at (x,y,z)(a) QSThis data is written only for ―ITYP=12, 13‖, namely electron and positron. ―QS‖ is dE/dx forelectrons.
52

QS: dE/dx of electron at (x,y,z)(4) IBLZ1, IBLZ2, ILEV1, ILEV2
These mean
IBLZ1

: cell id at (x, y, z)

IBLZ2: cell id after crossing

ILEV1: level structure id of the cell at (x, y, z)

ILEV2: level structure id of the cell after crossing(a) ILAT1
This is a variable of level structure of cell. The next data are written only for ILEV1>0 as
write(io) ( ( ILAT1(i,j), i=1,5 ), j=1,ILEV1 )(b) ILAT2This is a variable of level structure of cell. The next data are written only for ILEV2>0 as
write(io) ( ( ILAT2(i,j), i=1,5 ), j=1,ILEV2 )(5) NAME, NCNT(1), NCNT(2), NCNT(3)These mean
NAME

: collision number of the particle

NCNT(1,2,3): values of counter 1, 2 and 3(6) WT, U, V, W
These mean
WT

: weight of the particle at (xc, yc, zc)

U,V,W: unit vector of momentum of the particle(7) E, T, X, Y, Z
These meanE

: energy of the particle at (x, y, z) (MeV)T: time of the particle at (x, y, z) (nsec)

X, Y, Z: position coordinate of the preceding event point (cm)53

(8) EC, TC, XC, YC, ZC
These meanEC

: energy of the particle at (xc,yc,zc) (MeV)TC: time of the particle at (xc,yc,zc) (nsec)

XC, YC, ZC: position coordinate of the particle (cm)(9) SPX, SPY, SPZ
These mean
SPX, SPY, SPZ : unit vector of spin direction of the particle(10) NCLSTSThis variable is written only for ―NCOL=13, 14‖, collision case, and means the number of produced
particle and nucleus. The next data are written for ―NCLSTS>0‖ case.
(a) MATHZ, MATHN, JCOLL, KCOLL
These mean
MATHZ

: Z number of the mother nucleus

MATHN: N number of the mother nucleus

JCOLL
KCOLL

: reaction type id1: reaction type id2

JCOLL and KCOLL indicate the following meaning.
JCOLL0: nothing happen1: Hydrogen collisions

2: Particle decays

3: Elastic collisions

4: High energy nuclear collisions

5: Heavy ion reactions

6: Neutron reactions by data

7

: Photon reactions by data

8

: Electron reactions by data9

: Proton reactions by data

10

: Neutron event mode

54

KCOLL0: normal

1: high energy fission

2: high energy absorption

3: low energy n elastic

4: low energy n non-elastic

5: low energy n fission

6: low energy n absorption(b) ICLUSTS, JCLUSTS, QCLUSTS, JCOUNT
These variables have a array and denote the information of the produced particle and nucleus.
do i = 1, NCLSTS
write(io) ICLUSTS(i)write(io) ( JCLUSTS(j,i), j=0,7)
write(io) ( QCLUSTS(j,i), j=0,12)
write(io) ( JCOUNT(j,i), j=1,3)
end doThese mean

ICLUSTS0: nucleus

1: proton2: neutron3: pion4: photon5: kaon6: muon7: others

JCLUSTS(i)i=0: angular momentum=1: proton number=2: neutron number=3: ityp=4: status of the particle 0: real, <0 : dead=5

: charge number=6: baryon number=7: kf code
55

QCLUSTS(i)i=0: impact parameter=1: px (GeV/c)=2: py (GeV/c)=3: pz (GeV/c)

=4

:

=5

: rest mass (GeV)=6: excitation energy (MeV)=7: kinetic energy (MeV)=8: weight=9: time (nsec)=10: x coordinate (cm)=11

: y coordinate (cm)=12

: z coordinate (cm)etot 

p 2  m 2 (GeV)56

5.2.19 Event Generator ModeFor Event Generator mode, one should define ―dmax(2)‖ appropriately, since we need theinformation from the data base as metioned above. In the special statistical decay model, we use the detail
information of the level structure near the ground state for particle and photon emission. For this, we need―file(14)=trxcrd.dat‖ and ―igamma=1‖. We have developed the special statistical decay model based on
GEM. Then one should need to specify ―nevap=3‖. In this mode, the effect of thermal motion of material.
It means that we always assume ―T=0‖ in this mode. These conditions are automatically set if you specify―e-mode=1‖.
By this mode, we can obtaine the following new observables, which cannot be detected without thismode. First, the deposition energy distribution in [T-Heat] tally is available for low energy regime below―dmax(2)‖. Second, in [T-Yield] and [T-Product], we can tally the yield and product quantities below―dmax(2)‖. Third, the heat from neutrons is usually obtained from Kerma factor in the data base region. In
this mode, the heat from neutrons is zero, but the heat is calculated from energy loss of all charged
particles and nucleus. Fourth, DPA values is obtained even for the energy below ―dmax(2)‖ without DPA
data base.

57

5.3 [ S o u r c e ] section
You can set source information in this section. The source type is specified by the number of ―s-type= N‖.
Table 5-18: source typesource type

Explanations-type = 1

cylinder (or circle, pencil)s-type = 4cylinder with energy distributions-type = 2

rectangular solid (or rectangle)s-type = 5

rectangular solid with energy distributions-type = 3

Gaussian (x,y,z independent)s-type = 6

Gaussian with energy distribution (x,y,z independent)s-type = 7

generic parabola (x,y,z independent)s-type = 8

generic parabola with energy distribution (x,y,z independent)s-type = 9

sphere or spherical shells-type = 10

ssphere or spherical shell with energy distributions-type = 11

uniform distribution in a phase space vertical with beam directions-type = 12

reading the data from decay-turtle output

s-type = 13

gaussian (x-y plane)s-type = 14

Gaussian with energy distribution (x-y plane)s-type = 15

generic parabola (x-y plane)s-type = 16

generic parabola with energy distribution (x-y plane)s-type = 17

reading dump files-type = 100

user definition source
edit the usrsors.f and compile the PHITS

5.3.1 <Source> : Multi-source
By this multi-source function, one can define plural sources specified by s-type. Each source begins―<source> = number”, which defines the relative weight of the multi-sources. By ―totfact = ―, a global
normalization is defined.
Table 5-19: multi-source
parameter

Explanation<source> =defines a multi-source, the relative weight is defined by this number if this isgiven by a positive number, the source particle is generated according to thisratio. if negative, the same particle is generated in each multi-source sectionchanging the weight according to the ratio.

totfact =(D=1) global normalization factor
585.3.2 Common parameters
Common parameters for each source type are shown below. The order of the parameters in thesource section is free. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible. Theenergy of d, t, and nucleus is specified by [MeV/nucleon].
Table 5-20: common source parametersparameter

explanation

proj =
t-type = 0, 1, 2

Projectile(D=0) time distribution
0: no time distribution, t=0.0
1: rectangle distribution
2: Gaussian distribution

t0 =(D=0.0) center of time when t-type = 1 (ns)tw =FWHM of time distribution (ns)tn =Number of time distribution

td =Interval of time distribution (ns)tc

(D=10×tw) cut off time when Gaussian distribution t-type=2 (ns)sx =(D=0) x-component of spinsy =(D=0) y-component of spinsz =(D=0) z-component of spinreg =(D=all) specify the region
format is as reg = { 1 - 5 } 10 34.
You can use the lattice and universe frame as
reg = ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 )See the section about tally region specification for details.

ntmax =

(D=1000) maximum re-try number when reg is specified.

trcl =(D=none) transform number, or definition of transform

wgt =(D=1.0) weight of source particle

factor =(D=1.0) normalization of source particle

There are 3 parameters ―dir‖, ―phi‖, and ―dom‖ for specifying a projectile direction. The ―dir‖ is adirection cosine against z axis. If you set all, source becomes isotropic. If you set data, you need to specify
subsection started from a-type, in which you can define an angular distribution of the source particles bydata or any user difined analytic function. In ―s-type=9 and 10‖, the definition of dir is different. In―s-type=11 and 12‖, only 1 can be specified. ―phi‖ is an azimuthal cosine from x axis by degree. If you do
not specify it, azimuthal cosine is selected randomly. ―dom‖ gives solid angle from beam direction
specified by ―dir‖ and ‖phi‖ (degree). The angle is decided randomly within this solid angle.
You can use the transform of coordinate by ―trcl‖ parameter which specify the transform number orthe definition of transformation itself. The relation of ―wgt‖ and ―factor‖ is reciprocal.
59

If the spin is not defined or zero, the neutron goes into the magnetic field without spin. In this case,the initial spin of neutron is determined at the entrance of the magnetic field by the direction of themagnetic field and the polarization factor. If the spin is defined in this section, the neutron goes into themagnetic field with the spin direction irrespective of the direction of the magnetic field nor polarization.
5.3.3 Cylinder distribution source
Parameters for cylinder source are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has adefault value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 5-21: parameters for cylinder sources-type = 1, 4cylinder or circle sourcex0 =(D=0.0) x coordinate of center position of cylinder source (cm)y0 =(D=0.0) y coordinate of center position of cylinder source (cm)z0 =minimum z of cylinder source (cm)z1 =maximum z of cylinder source (cm), (when z1=z0, circle plane source)r0 =radius of cylinder source, (when r0=0.0, pencil source) (cm)r1 =(D=0.0) inner radius for inner void of cylinder

dir =direction cosine of projectile against z axis
If you set all, it is isotropic
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessaryphi =phi = (D=none; random) azimuthal angel (degree)dom =(D=0.0) solid angle (degree)= -1 ; cos2 bias distributione0 =projectile energy (s-type=1) (MeV)60

5.3.4 Rectangular solid distribution source
Parameters for rectangular solid source are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If aparameter has a default value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 5-22: parameters for rectangular solid sources-type = 2, 5

rectangular solid and rectangle source

x0 =minimum x coordinate (cm)x1 =maximum x coordinate (cm)y0 =minimum y coordinate (cm)y1 =maximum y coordinate (cm)z0 =minimum z coordinate (cm)z1 =maximum y coordinate (cm), when (z1=z0), rectangle source

dir =direction cosine from z axis
If you set all, isotropic
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessaryphi =(D=none; random) azimuthal angle (degree)dom =(D=0.0) solid angle (degree)= -1 ; cos2 bias distributione0 =projectile energy (s-type=2) (MeV)61

5.3.5 Gaussian distribution source (x,y,z independent)
This Gauss distribution is consist of independent Gaussian in each x, y, z direction. Parameters for
Gaussian source are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default value(D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 5-23: parameters for Gaussian sources-type = 3, 6

Gaussian sourcex0 =(D=0.0) x coordinate of Gaussian center (cm)x1 =FWHM in x direction (cm)y0 =(D=0.0) y coordinate of Gaussian center (cm)y1 =FWHM in y direction (cm)z0 =(D=0.0) z coordinate of Gaussian center (cm)z1 =FWHM in z direction (cm)dir =direction cosine from z axis
If you set all, isotropic
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessaryphi =(D=none; random) azimuthal angle (degree)dom =(D=0.0) solid angle (degree)= -1 ; cos2 bias distributione0 =projectile energy(s-type=3) (MeV)62

5.3.6 Generic parabola distribution source (x,y,z independent)
This generic parabola distribution is consist of independent parabola in each x, y, z direction.
Parameters for generic parabola source are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameterhas a default value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 5-24: parameters for generic parabola distributions-type = 7, 8

generic parabola sourcex0 =(D=0.0) x coordinate of X-parabola center (cm)x1 =X-parabola width(cm)y0 =(D=0.0) y coordinate of Y-parabola center (cm)y1 =Y-parabola width(cm)z0 =minimum z of parabola (cm)z1 =maximum z of parabola (cm)rn =(D=2) order of generic parabola

dir =direction cosine from z axis
If you set all, isotropic
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessaryphi =(D=none; random) azimuthal angel (degree)dom =(D=0.0) solid angle (degree)= -1 ; cos2 bias distributione0 =projectile energy (s-type=7) (MeV)63

5.3.7 Gaussian distribution source (x-y plane)
This source is a Gaussian distribution in x-y plane. Parameters for Gaussian source are shown below.
The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), the parameter can beomissible.
Table 5-25: parameters for Gaussian sources-type = 13, 14

Gaussian sourcex0 =(D=0.0) x coordinate of Gaussian center (cm)y0 =(D=0.0) y coordinate of Gaussian center (cm)r1 =FWHM in x-y plane (cm)z0 =minimum z coordinate (cm)z1 =(D=z0) maximum z coordinate (cm)dir =direction cosine from z axis
If you set all, isotropic
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessaryphi =(D=none; random) azimuthal angle (degree)dom =(D=0.0) solid angle (degree)= -1 ; cos2 bias distributione0 =projectile energy(s-type=3) (MeV)

5.3.8 Generic parabola distribution source (x-y plane)
This source is a generic parabola distribution in x-y plane. Parameters for generic parabola source areshown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), the parametercan be omissible.
Table 5-26: parameters for generic parabola distributions-type = 15, 16

generic parabola sourcex0 =(D=0.0) x coordinate of X-parabola center (cm)y0 =(D=0.0) y coordinate of Y-parabola center (cm)r1 =parabola width in x-y plane (cm)z0 =minimum z of parabola (cm)z1 =maximum z of parabola (cm)rn =(D=2) order of generic parabola

dir =direction cosine from z axis
If you set all, isotropic
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessaryphi =(D=none; random) azimuthal angel (degree)dom =(D=0.0) solid angle (degree)= -1 ; cos2 bias distributione0 =projectile energy (s-type=7) (MeV)64

5.3.9 Sphere and sphere shell distribution source
Parameters for sphere and sphere shell source are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If aparameter has a default value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 5-27: parameters for sphere and sphere shell sources-type = 9, 10

sphere and sphere shell sourcex0 =(D=0.0) x coordinate of sphere center (cm)y0 =(D=0.0) y coordinate of sphere center (cm)z0 =(D=0.0) z coordinate of sphere center (cm)r1 =inside radius (cm). If ―r1=0‖, sphere sourcer2 =outside radius (cm)dir =direction
dir = 1.0 : outgoing from the center with normal line direction
dir = -1.0 : inverse direction with dir=1.0
dir = all : isotropic
dir = -all : inverse direction against dir=1.0, and with cosine distribution.
This is used for volume and area calculation with cos2 bias

e0 =projectile energy (s-type=10) (MeV)

When you use the source type‖ s-type=9‖ for volume and area calculation, you should set as ―dir =-all‖, ―r1= r2‖.

65

5.3.10 s-type = 11This is a uniform distribution source in a phase space which is vertical with beam direction.
Parameters for this source type are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has adefault value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 5-28: parameters for s-type = 11s-type = 11

uniform distribution in a phase space vertical with beam direction

x0 =(D=0.0) x coordinate of beam center (cm)x1 =ratio of (maximum radius)/(minimum radius) for x direction (cm/mrad)

y0 =(D=0.0) y coordinate of beam center (cm)y1 =ratio of (maximum radius)/(minimum radius) for y direction (cm/mrad)

z0 =minimum z (cm)z1 =maximum z (cm)rx =gradient of ellipse in a phase space on x direction (rad)ry =gradient of ellipse in a phase space on y direction (rad)wem =emittance (cm ×mrad )dir =direct cosine (1 or -1 only)

e0 =projectile energy (MeV)66

5.3.11 s-type = 12
In this source type, decay-turtle output is read as a source. Parameters for this source type are shown
below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), the parameter can beomissible.
The input file is rewinded and re-used from the first particle again, if all of source in decay-turtle isread before the calculation finishes.
Table 5-29: parameters for s-type = 12
s-type = 12

decay-turtle readingx0 =(D=0.0) x coordinate offset of beam (cm)y0 =(D=0.0) y coordinate offset of beam (cm)z0 =(D=0.0) z coordinate offset of beam (cm)dir =direction cosine(1 or -1 only)

file =

decay-turtle filename (with full pathname)

The format of decay-turtle is double precision, and ascii, and each record is asxp, xq, yp, yq, e0, wt0, pz0
Table 5-30: decay-turtle data
variable

Explanation

xp, ypincoming position of beam particle (cm)xq, yqangle against vertical face with beam direction (mrad)e0

momentum of beam particle (GeV/c)

wt0

weight of beam particle

pz0

polarizing of beam particle (be not in use)

5.3.12 Source with dump fileIn this source type, the data of the dump file is read in as source. Parameters for the ―type = 17‖ areshown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), the parametercan be omissible.
The dump file is rewinded and re-used from the first data again, if all of source in the dump file isread before the calculation finishes.

67

Table 5-31: parameters for dump file sources-type = 17

reading dump file

file =

dump filename (with full pathname)dump =

dump = number of dump data. if it is negative, data is written by Ascii.

(next line)

identification of dump data(omissible)

If the following parameters are specified, these values have priority over the
dump data. If the dump data does not include the following data, one should
specify the parameters.

x0 =minimum x coordinate (cm)x1 =maximum x coordinate (cm)y0 =minimum y coordinate (cm)y1 =maximum y coordinate (cm)z0 =minimum z coordinate (cm)z1 =maximum z coordinate (cm)sx =(D=0) x-component of spinsy =(D=0) y-component of spinsz =(D=0) z-component of spin

dir =direction cosine from z axis
If you set all, isotropic
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessaryphi =(D=none; random) azimuthal angel (degree)dom =(D=0.0) solid angle (degree)= -1 ; cos2 bias distributione0 =projectile energy (s-type=7) (MeV)e-type =type of energy distribution

wgt =(D=1.0) weight of source particle

factor =(D=1.0) normalization of source particle(omissible)

one can also specify below parameterst-type =(D=0) time distribution

reg =(D=all) specify the region

ntmax =

(D=1000) maximum re-try number when reg is specified.

trcl =(D=none) transform number, or definition of transform

By the parameter of ―dump =‖, the number of the dump data in one record is specified. If thisnumber is given by a positive number, the data is read as binary data. If negative, the data is read as asci
data. In the next line, the data sequence of one record is described. The relation between the physicalquantities and id number is the followings,

68

Table 5-32: id number of dump data (1)physical

kf

x

y

z

u

v

w

e

wt

time

C1

C2

C3

sx

sy

sz

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

quantities
id
numberTable 5-33: id number of dump data (2)physical quantities

name

nocas

nobch

no

id number

17

18

19

20

Here ―kf‖ means the kf-code of the particles identification (see table 4), ―x, y, z‖ are coordinate (cm),―u, v, w‖ denote the unit vector of the direction of the particle, ―e‖ is the energy (MeV, or MeV/nucleon
for nucleus), ―wt‖ is the weight, time is the initial time (ns), ―c1, c2, c3‖ are the values of counters, and―sx, sy, sz‖ are the unit vector of the direction of spin, respectively name is a collsion number of theparticle, ―nocas‖ is a current event number of this batch, ―nobch‖ is a current batch number, ―no‖ is acascade id in this event. These are assumed as real*8 for the binary data, n(1p1e24.15) data format for theascii data.
For an example, one record has 9 data as
kf e wt x y z u v w
To read this data, we write the parameters as
dump = 9189234567

695.3.13 User definition source
If you edit ―usrsors.f‖, you can use your original source function by ―s-type=100‖. If the following
parameters are set, these values have the priority. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), theparameter can be omissible.
Table 5-34: the parameters can be specified in s-type=100
s-type = 100

user definition source
If below parameters are specified, these values have priority over the user
defined data.

x0 =minimum x coordinate (cm)x1 =maximum x coordinate (cm)y0 =minimum y coordinate (cm)y1 =maximum y coordinate (cm)z0 =minimum z coordinate (cm)z1 =maximum z coordinate (cm)sx =(D=0) x-component of spinsy =(D=0) y-component of spinsz =(D=0) z-component of spin

dir =direction cosine from z axis
If you set all, isotropic
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessaryphi =(D=none; random) azimuthal angel (degree)dom =(D=0.0) solid angle (degree)= -1 ; cos2 bias distributione0 =projectile energy (s-type=7) (MeV)e-type =type of energy distribution

wgt =(D=1.0) weight of source particle

factor =(D=1.0) normalization of source particle

t-type =(D=0) time distribution

reg =(D=all) specify the region

ntmax =

(D=1000) maximum re-try number when reg is specified.

trcl =(D=none) transform number, or definition of transform

We show a sample program of ―usrsors.f‖ as follwing. In the first comment part, there is a list of thevariables which is necessary to define the source. Next there is a list of ―kf-code‖ which specifies thesource particle. In the last part of the comment, the random number functions, one is an uniform random
number, the other is a Gaussian random number, are shown. The first part of the program is an example ofthe initialization, which describes the open and close the data file. The remaining part shows a list of thevariables which user should define in this subroutine.
70

List 5.1 ● usrsors.f
1: ************************************************************************
2:subroutine usrsors(x,y,z,u,v,w,e,wt,time,name,kf,nc1,nc2,nc3,3:&sx,sy,sz)
4: *sample subroutine for user defined source.
*
5: *variables :*6: *x, y, z : position of the source.
*
7: *u, v, w : unit vector of the particle direction.
*
8: *e: kinetic energy of particle (MeV).
*
9: *
wt
: weight of particle.
*
10: *
time
: initial time of particle. (ns)
*
11: *
name
: usually = 1, for Coulmb spread.
*
12: *
kf
: kf code of the particle.
*
13: *
nc1
: initial value of counter 1
*
14: *
nc2
: initial value of counter 2
*
15: *
nc3
: initial value of counter 3*
16: *sx,sy,sz : spin components*
17: *----------------------------------------------------------------------*
18: *kf code table*
19: *kf-code: ityp : description*
20: *2212 : 1 : proton*
21: *2112 : 2 : neutron*
22: *211 : 3 : pion (+)*
23: *111 : 4 : pion (0)*24: *-211 : 5 : pion (-)*
25: *-13 : 6 : muon (+)*
26: *13 : 7 : muon (-)*
27: *321 : 8 : kaon (+)*
28: *311 : 9 : kaon (0)*29: *-321 : 10 : kaon (-)*
30: *kf-code of the other transport particles
*
31: *
12 :
nu_e
*
32: *
14 :
nu_mu
*
33: *
221 :
eta
*
34: *
331 :
eta'
*
35: *
-311 :
k0bar
*
36: *
-2112 :
nbar
*
37: *
-2212 :
pbar
*
38: *
3122 :
Lanbda0*
39: *3222 :
Sigma+*
40: *3212 :
Sigma0*41: *3112 :
Sigma*
42: *3322 :
Xi0*
43: *3312 :
Xi*
44: *3334 :
Omega*
45: *----------------------------------------------------------------------*
46: *available function for random number*
47: *unirn(dummy) : uniform random number from 0 to 1*
48: *gaurn(dummy) : gaussian random number*
49: *for exp( - x**2 / 2 / sig**2 ) : sig = 1.0 *50: ************************************************************************
51:
implicit real*8 (a-h,o-z)
52: *----------------------------------------------------------------------53:
parameter ( pi = 3.141592653589793d0 )54:data ifirst / 0 /55:
save ifirst56:
character filenm*50
57: *----------------------------------------------------------------------58: *example of initialization
59: *----------------------------------------------------------------------71

60:
61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
67:
68:
69:
70:
71:
72:
73:
74:
75:
76:
77:
78:
79:
80:
81:
82:
83:
84:
85:
86:
87:
88:
89:
90:
91:
92:
93:
94:

c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c

if( ifirst .eq. 0 ) thenfilenm = 'input.dat'
inquire( file = filenm, exist = exex )if( exex .eqv. .false. ) thenwrite(*,*) 'file does not exist => ', filenm
call parastop( 887 )end ifopen(71, file = file(i), status = 'old' )close(71)
ifirst = 1

end if*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
example for 3 GeV proton with z-direction*----------------------------------------------------------------------x = 0.0
y = 0.0
z = 0.0
u = 0.0v = 0.0
w = 1.0
e = 3000.0
wt = 1.0
time = 0.0
name = 1
kf = 2212
nc1 = 0nc2 = 0nc3 = 0sx = 0.d0
sy = 0.d0
sz = 0.d0*----------------------------------------------------------------------returnend

725.3.14 Definition for energy distribution
In the energy distribution source type ―s-type = 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 14, and 16‖, or ―s-type = 17 and 100‖with e-type parameter, energy distribution parameters are required as shown below. If a parameter has adefault value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 5-35: parameters for source energy distribution (1)parametere-type = 1, (11)Explanation
give energy and weight by handfor 11 case, energy is given by wave length (Å)
number of particle generation in a cell is proportinal to w(i)ne =number of energy group
If it is given by positive number, linear interplation is assumed in a bin.
if negative, logarithmic interplation is assumed in a bin.
data must be given from the next line by the format as(e(i),w(i),i=1,ne), e(ne+1)

e-type = 4, (14)give energy and weight by handfor 14 case, energy is given by wave length (Å)
number of particle generation in a cell is proportinal to p(i)ne =ne = number of energy groupdata must be given from the next line by the format below
If it is given by positive number, linear interplation is assumed in a bin.
if negative, logarithmic interplation is assumed in a bin.
in default (p-type=0), equal number of particle is generated in each cell(e(i),w(i),i=1,ne), e(ne+1)

p-type = 0, 1

p-type = 0, 1 (D=0) generation option
for 0, p(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following data.
for 1, p(i) must be given from the next line by the format as(p(i),i=1,ne)

For neutron optics, we prepare an alternative option to specify the energy as wave length. If you
specify ―etype= 11, 12, 14‖, you can use wave length (Å) as an energy unit. For the other case, you can
use the mathematical expressions as ―e0=8.180425e-8/13**2‖, which gives the energy of neutron with13Åwave length.

73

Table 5-36: parameters for source energy distribution (2)parametere-type = 2, (12)Explanation
Gaussian distribution
for 12 case, energy is given by wave length (Å)

eg0 =center of Gaussian distribution (MeV)eg1 =FWHM of Gaussian distribution (MeV)eg2 =minimum cut off for Gaussian distribution (MeV)eg3 =maximum cut off for Gaussian distribution (MeV)e-type = 3

Maxwellian distribution : f ( x)  x

nm =(D=-200) number of energy group

1.5

exp( x / T )If it is given by positive number, linear interplation is assumed in a bin.
if negative, logarithmic interplation is assumed in a bin.
number of particle generation in a cell is proportinal to f(x)et0 =

temperature parameter T (MeV)et1 =minimum cut off for Maxwellian distribution (MeV)et2 =maximum cut off for Maxwellian distribution (MeV)e-type = 7

Maxwellian distribution : f ( x)  x

nm =(D=-200) number of energy group

1.5

exp( x / T )If it is given by positive number, linear interplation is assumed in a bin.
if negative, logarithmic interplation is assumed in a bin.
in default (p-type=0), equal number of particle is generated in each cell
et0 =temperature parameter T (MeV)et1 =minimum cut off for Maxwellian distribution (MeV)et2 =maximum cut off for Maxwellian distribution (MeV)

p-type = 0, 1

(D=0) generation option
for 0, p(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following data.
for 1, p(i) must be given from the next line by the format as(p(i),i=1,ne)

74

Table 5-37: parameters for source energy distribution (3)parametere-type = 5, (15)explanatione-type = 5, (15) energy distribution is given by f(x)for 15 case, energy is given by wave length (Å)f(x) =

f(x) = any analytical function of x, Fortran style
one can use intrinsic functions and constants C.

nm =number of energy group
If it is given by positive number, linear interplation is assumed in a bin.
if negative, logarithmic interplation is assumed in a bin.
number of particle generation in a cell is proportinal to f(x)eg1 =minimum cut off for energy distribution (MeV)eg2 =maximum cut off for energy distribution (MeV)e-type = 6, (16)energy distribution is given by f(x)for 16 case, energy is given by wave length (Å)f(x) =

any analytical function of x, Fortran style
one can use intrinsic functions and constants C.

nm =number of energy group
If it is given by positive number, linear interplation is assumed in a bin.
if negative, logarithmic interplation is assumed in a bin.
in default (p-type=0), equal number of particle is generated in each celleg1 =minimum cut off for energy distribution (MeV)eg2 =maximum cut off for energy distribution (MeV)

p-type = 0, 1

(D=0) generation option
for 0, p(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following data.
for 1, p(i) must be given from the next line by the format as (p(i),i=1,nm)

75

5.3.15 Definition for angular distribution
If you set ―dir = data‖, angular distribution parameters are required as shown below. If a parameterhas a default value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 5-38: parameters for source angular distribution (1)parametera-type = 1, (11)explanation
give angle and weight by handfor 1 case, angle is given by cosine, for 11 case, given by degree
number of particle generation in a cell is proportinal to w(i)na =number of angular group
If it is given by positive number, linear interplation is assumed in a bin.
if negative, logarithmic interplation is assumed in a bin.
data must be given from the next line by the format as(a(i),w(i),i=1,na), a(na+1)

a-type = 4, (14)give angular and weight by handfor 4 case, angle is given by cosine, for 14 case, given by degree
number of particle generation in a cell is proportinal to p(i)na =number of angular groupdata must be given from the next line by the format below
If it is given by positive number, linear interplation is assumed in a bin.
if negative, logarithmic interplation is assumed in a bin.
in default (q-type=0), equal number of particle is generated in each cell(a(i),w(i),i=1,na), a(na+1)

q-type = 0, 1

(D=0) generation option
for 0, q(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following data.
for 1, q(i) must be given from the next line by the format as(q(i),i=1,na)76

Table 5-39: parameters for source angular distribution (2)parameter
a- type = 5, (15)explanation
angular distribution is given by g(x)for 5 case, angle is given by cosine, for 15 case, given by degree

g(x) =

any analytical function of x, Fortran style
one can use intrinsic functions and constants C.

nn =number of angular group
If it is given by positive number, linear interplation is assumed in a bin.
if negative, logarithmic interplation is assumed in a bin.
number of particle generation in a cell is proportinal to g(x)ag1 =minimum cut off for angular distribution

ag2 =

maximum cut off for angular distribution

a- type = 6, (16)angular distribution is given by g(x)for 6 case, angle is given by cosine, for 16 case, given by degree

g(x) =

any analytical function of x, Fortran style
one can use intrinsic functions and constants C.

nn =number of angular group
If it is given by positive number, linear interplation is assumed in a bin.
if negative, logarithmic interplation is assumed in a bin.
in default (q-type=0), equal number of particle is generated in each
cell

ag1 =

minimum cut off for angular distribution

ag2 =

maximum cut off for angular distribution

q-type = 0, 1

(D=0) generation option
for 0, q(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following data.
for 1, q(i) must be given from the next line by the format as(q(i),i=1,nn)

77

5.3.16 Example of multi-source
We introduce an example of multi-source, which includes energy distribution and angular
distribution described by analytic functions. The list of third multi-source is shown below.
List 5.2 ● Example of multi-source
1: [ S o u r c e ]2:
totfact = 3
3: <source> = 9.72
4:s-type = 4
5:proj = proton
6:z0 = 27:z1 = 298:
r0 = 59:
r1 = 410:
dir = 0.0
11:
e-type = 612:eg1 = 1.e-6
13:eg2 = 1.e-3
14:
nm = -200
15:
set: c10[1.e-4]
16:f(x) = x**(1.5)*exp(-x/c10)
17: <source> = 1
18:
s-type = 4
19:proj = photon
20:
z0 = 121:
z1 = 222:
r0 = 523:
dir = -124:
e-type = 525:
eg1 = 1.e-3
26:eg2 = 5.e-1
27:
nm = 200
28:
set: c10[1.e-1]
29:
set: c20[1.e-1/2.35482]
30:
f(x) = exp(-(x-c10)**2/2/c20**2)
31: <source> = 1
32:
s-type = 4
33:proj = neutron34:
z0 = 2935:
z1 = 3036:
r0 = 537:
e-type = 638:
eg1 = 1.e-239:eg2 = 1.e+340:
nm = -200
41:
set: c10[92.469]
42:
set: c20[5.644e+10]43:f(x) = c10/c20*exp(-sqrt(x*(x+1876))/c10)*(x+938)/sqrt(x*(x+1876))44:
dir = data45:
a-type = 546:
ag1 = 047:
ag2 = 148:
nn = 20049:g(x) = exp(-(x-1)**2/0.3**2)
In this example, there are three source subsections started from <source>. In the first source
subsection, we define a cylinder source from z=2cm to z=29cm with 5cm radius, and we set ―r1=4‖. This78

―r1=4‖ means that the region inside the cylinder with radius 4cm is not included. In the next source, it isalso a cylinder source from z=1cm to z=2cm with 5cm radius without ―r1‖. This is a normal thin cylinder.
The last one is also a thin cylinder from z=29cm to z=30cm with 5cm radius. The numbers defined after
each <source> denote the relative weight of the multi-source. In this example, the relative weight isdetermined by the relative volume ratio of each source. This means that the source particles are generated
uniformly in each source volume. The coodinate distribution of the generated source particles is shown in
Figure 1 using [t-product] tally with ―output=source‖, and ―icntl=6‖.

Figure 5-1: Multi-source, coordinate distribution
The source particles of the multi-source are proton, photon and neutron. In each subsection, theenergy distribution of the source particle is defined as Maxwellian, Gaussian, and user defined analytical
function by using the expression of those function with Fortran style. The first Maxwellian distribution isjust equivalent to the expression by e-type=7 as79

e-type = 7
et0 = 1.e-4
et1 = 1.e-6
et2 = 1.e-3
The second Gaussian distribution is also equivalent to the expression by e-type=2 ase-type = 2
eg0 = 1.e-1
eg1 = 1.e-1
eg2 = 1.e-4
eg3 = 5.e-1
These energy distributions are shown below by using [t-product] tally with output=source, andicntl=6. The result of each particle is shown with different colors in this figure.

Figure 5-2: Multi-source, energy distribution
The first source has an angular distribution defined by ―dir=0‖, which means 90 degree direction
with respect to z-axis, the second one has ―dir=-1‖, 180 degree direction, and the third one has an angular
distribution defined by a-type description in which we used an analytic function for an angular
distribution. The angular distribution of the third one is shown in Figure 5-3 by using [T-Cross] tally.

80

Figure 5-3: Multi-source, angular distribution

815.3.17 Duct source option
For the simulation of neutrons through the long beam-line from the moderator of spallation neutron
source or the reactor to the detector room, we have prepared the following duct source options to reducethe variance in the calculations. The beam current transported through the beam-line decreases proportinal
to the inverse square of the distance from the moderator. This means that the current crossing the wall of
the beam-line, which is called as ‖wall current‖, at 100 m point is six order of magnitude smaller than thatat 1 m point from the source if we assme isotropic distribution of the source direction. To reduce thisvariance, we have introduced a special options of the source function in which the wall current of thesimulation particles is eqaulized at any point of the beam-line by changing the importance weight of theparticles to simulate a real situation of the current inside the beam-line.
We set the duct source options for s-type = 1, 4, 2, 5, circle and rectangle source, by dom = -10. The
parameters for the duct source options are summarized in Table 45.
Table 5-40: parameters for duct source options
parameter

Explanation

dom = -10

specify the duct source

dl0 =starting z position of the beam-line from z0 (cm)dl1 =starting z position of the duct source from z0 (cm)dl2 =ending z position of the duct source from z0 (cm)dpf =portion of pass through particles at dl2

drd =radius of circle beam line for s-type = 1, 4 (cm)dxw =x size of rectangle beam line for s-type = 2, 5 (cm)dyw =y size of rectangle beam line for s-type = 2, 5 (cm)We assume circle or rectangle beam-line for ―s-type = 1, 4‖ or ―s-type = 2, 5‖, respectively. ―z1 =z0‖ and ―dir = 1‖ are also assumed, the latter means the direction of the beam-line. If you want to change
the direction of the beam-line, you should use the transformation ―trcl = number of transformation”. The
source particles are generated whitin the circle or rectangle region at ―z0‖ defined by ―r0 or x0, x1, y0,y1‖, for ―s-type = 1, 4‖ or ―s-type = 2, 5‖, respectively. The direction of the particle is determined by thewall position where it reaches within ―dl1‖ and ―dl2‖ so as to equalize the wall current at any point within
this region changing the importance of the particle. Overall nomarization factor is defined as a number ofthe sorce particles which pass the entrance of beam-line at ―dl0‖ originated within the same region at thesouce position ―z0‖ as that at ―dl0‖. We normally set the number to be unit for one event if all duct wall
position from ―dl0‖ to ―dl2‖ can see the source region at ―z0‖. If the source region at ―z0‖ is larger than
the area of the beam-line at ―dl0‖, the source particle from the outer region at ―z0‖ is not counted as thenormalization number at ―dl0‖. This means that the extra region at ―z0‖ increases the current in the
beam-line without changing the normalization factor. In the above argument, we assume isotropic angular
distribution of the source partilces within the small solid angle which covers the whole beam-lin.
We show some example of the duct source option in the following. In the first example, we use therectangle source and beam-line, the same size of the source and beam-line dimensions. Here we show the82input for the duct source option,
List 5.3 ●duct source option, example 1
1[Source]2:
3: set: c1[200]$dl0
4: set: c2[500]$dl1
5: set: c3[5000] $dl2
6: set: c4[5.0]$x*2 at z0
7: set: c5[5.0]$y*2 at z0
8: set: c10[5.0] $dxw
9: set: c20[5.0] $dyw
10: set: c30[0.001] $dpf
11:
12: s-type = 2
13: proj = neutron
14: e0= 20.015: x0= -c4/2
16: x1= c4/2
17: y0= -c5/2
18: y1= c5/2
19: z0= 0.0
20: z1= 0.0
21: dir= 1.0
22: phi= 0.0
23:
24: dom = -10
25: dl0 = c1
26: dl1 = c2
27: dl2 = c3
28: dxw = c10
29: dyw = c20
30: dpf = c30
In the first part of above source section, we define some constants which are necessary for the ductsource option, ―dl0, dl1, dl2‖, size of source, ―dxw, dyw, dpf‖. In the second part, we define the position
and xy region of the source, direction of the beam-line and the energy of source particle. In the third part,
we define the duct source options. We calculated particle tansport in the beam-line from 5 m up to 50 mby this duct source and the current, wall current by ussing the cross tally. The results are shown in Figure
4 compared with an ideal case in which the current and the wall current are proportinal to 1/L2 and 1/L3,
respectively. The cross marker in the figure indicates the position of ―dl0‖ and show that the current at
this point is unit. The results of the duct source option agree very well with the analytical results.

83

Figure 5-4: duct source option, example 1
In the next example, we changed only the size of the souce from the previous example.
List 5.4
1
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:

●duct source option, example 2[Source]set: c1[200]$dl0set: c2[500]$dl1
set: c3[5000] $dl2
set: c4[10.0] $x*2 at z0
set: c5[10.0] $y*2 at z0
set: c10[5.0] $dxw
set: c20[5.0] $dyw
set: c30[0.001] $dpf
s-type = 2
proj = neutrone0= 20.0x0= -c4/2
x1= c4/2y0= -c5/2
y1= c5/2
z0
= 0.0
z1
= 0.0
dir
= 1.0
phi
= 0.0
84

24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:

dom = -10
dl0 = c1
dl1 = c2dl2 = c3
dxw = c10
dyw = c20
dpf = c30

Figure 5-5 shows how the extra region of the source increases the current and the wall current. By
this function, you can automatically treat the margin area of the moderator to the size of the cross-sectionof beam-line.

Figure 5-5: duct source option, example 2.

85

5.4 [ M a t e r i a l ] section
5.4.1 Formats
Material is defined in this section. There are two formats for material definition as shown below.
First, the conventional format as[Material]
MAT[m]
nucleus density
nucleus density
nucleus density
nucleus density
MAT[m]
keyword=value .....
nucleus density
nucleus density
MTm S() identifier ....
MAT[m]......
.......
......
.......
In addition, other definition format can be used as[Material]
Mm nucleus density
nucleus density
nucleus density}
nucleus density
Mm
keyword=value .....
nucleus density
nucleus density
nucleus density
nucleus density
MTm S() identifier ....
Mm......
.......
......
.......
Here m can be specified up to material number 9999 unless over-defined.
5.4.2 Nuclide definition
The nucleus can be defined by various format as 208Pb, Pb-208, 82208.
Hydrogen is defined as 1H, H-1, 1001. You can use natural isotope ratio if you use no-mass style asPb, 82000. If you want to use nuclear data, add library number (double-digit) and data class (a charactera-z) after nuclide definition after period as 208Pb.24c, Pb-208.24c, 82208.24c.
5.4.3 Density definition
Two units are available for density definition. If density takes positive value, it means particle density
as [1024 atoms/cm3] else if negative value, mass density [g/cm3]. These densities can be re-defined in the[Region] and [Cell] sections. So if you have density definition in the [Region] of [Cell] section, you don’t
need to set density, alternatively you can set composition ratio here.

865.4.4 Material parameters
For the region in which you use nuclear data, you can set material parameters for each material as thestyle keyword=value. Anywhere you can write this parameters in the material subsection.
Parameters are shown below.
Table 5-41: material parameterparametervalue

explanation

GAS(D = 0)density effect correction to electron stopping power=0

appropriate for material in the condensed (solid or liquid) state

=1

used
appropriate for material in the gaseous state used

ESTEP

=n

make sub step number n for electron transport
it is ignored when n is smaller than built-in default value

NLIB

= id

change default neutron library number id

PLIB

= id

change default photon library number id

ELIB

= id

change default electron library number id

COND

conductor settings<0

non-conductor=0(Default) non-conductor if there exist at least 1 non-conductor,
otherwise conductor>0

conductor if there exist at least 1 conductor

5.4.5 S(,) settingsS(,) library can be set here. You have to set library in the same material sub section in PHITS
code. So m of MTm means material number of the material.
5.4.6 Examples
Some examples are shown below.
List 5.5 ● material example (1)1: [ M a t e r i a l ]2: MAT[ 1 ]3:
1H
1.0000000E-04
4: 208Pb
1.7238000E-02
5: 204Pb
4.6801000E-04
6: 206Pb
7.9430000E-03
7: 207Pb
7.2838000E-03
8: MAT[ 2 ]9:1H1.0000000E-09
10:
14N
4.6801000E-05
11:
16O
7.9430000E-06
By default, the order is nuclide, then density. You can specify them in reverse by putting the ―den‖87and ― nuc‖ as,
List 5.6 ● material example (2)1: [ M a t e r i a l ]
2:
den
nuc
3: MAT[ 1 ]4: 1.0000000E-04
1H
5: 1.7238000E-02
208Pb
6: 4.6801000E-04
204Pb
7: 7.9430000E-03
206Pb
8: 7.2838000E-03
207Pb
9: MAT[ 2 ]10: 1.0000000E-09
1H
11: 4.6801000E-05
14N
12: 7.9430000E-06
16O<------

List 5.7 ● material example (3)1: [ M a t e r i a l ]2: m1
80196.49c 5.9595d-5
3:80198.49c 3.9611d-3
4:80199.49c 6.7025d-3
5:80200.49c 9.1776d-3
6:80201.49c 5.2364d-3
7:80202.49c 1.1863d-2
8:80204.49c 2.2795d-3
9: c...Be...
10: m34009.37c 1.2362E-1
11: mt3
be.01
12: c...h2o (25C)...
13: m41001.37c 6.6658d-2
8016.37c 3.3329d-2
14: mt4lwtr.01
15: c...b4c (natural boron; 25%-density)...
16: m56012.37c 6.8118d-3
17:5011.37c 2.1825d-2
18: c...liquid-h2 (20K)...
19: m61001.49c 3.1371d-2
1011.49c 1.0457d-2
20: mt6orthoh.00 parah.00

88

5.5 [ B o d y ] section
5.5.1 formats
You can set body definition by the CG geometry in this section. In this section definition, you canwrite any comments after [Body] section name as ―[Body] HIMAC experiment‖. But you can not use
comments which begins off here, otherwise, the [Body] section is skipped.
Parameters ―idbg‖, ―ibod‖ and ―naz‖ can be set at beginning of this section. If omitted, default values
are used instead.
Table 5-42: body control parameters
name

value

Explanation

idbg(D = 0)debugging options

ibod

naz

=0

none

=1

CG input echo=2

CG debugging(D=1)

body number=0

omitting body number>0body number(D=0)

array size for keeping data for tangent region
By default, it is set already at least for 5 regions.
If you need more than 5, give number=0(generally, input 0)>0

general value
maximum number of tangent region

These parameters can be written in a line as
idbg = 0 ; ibod = 1 ; naz = 0
Body should be defined by body name symbol (sym), body number (num), and body shape definition(def). These order can be changed, but body shape definition (def) must be put at the last of line. Default
order isnum sym def
If you have additional column you can skip the column by the non declaration. Details for bodysymbol and body shape definition is quite same as the CG geometry system. If you skip to specify bodynumber, PHITS gives body number in order from top automatically. In the case body shape definition can
not be written in 1 line, you can write in the next line without no symbols. Some examples are shown
below.
89

5.5.2 Examples
List 5.8 ● body example (1)1: [ B o d y ] body example 12:
1 rpp-7.5000000E+00
3:-7.5000000E+00
4:-1.0000000E+01
5:2 sph
0.0000000E+00
6:
3 sph
0.0000000E+00

7.5000000E+00
7.5000000E+00
1.0000000E+01
0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 9.9900000E+01
0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+02

List 5.9 ● body example (2)1: [ B o d y ] body example 2
2: idbg = 0 ; ibod = 0 ; naz = 03:
rpp-7.5000000E+00 7.5000000E+00
4:-7.5000000E+00 7.5000000E+00
5:-1.0000000E+01 1.0000000E+01
6:sph
0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 9.9900000E+01
7:sph
0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+02

List 5.10 ● body example (3)1: [ B o d y ] body example 3
2: idbg = 0 ; ibod = 1 ; naz = 0
3:num sym
def
4:
1 rpp
-7.5000000E+00
5:-7.5000000E+00
6:-1.0000000E+01
7:
2 sph
0.0000000E+00
8:
3 sph
0.0000000E+00

7.5000000E+00
7.5000000E+00
1.0000000E+01
0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 9.9900000E+01
0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+02

List 5.11 ● body example (4)1: [ B o d y ] body example 4
2: idbg = 0 ; ibod = 1 ; naz = 0
3:
non sym num def
4:
1 rpp 5 -7.5000000E+00
5:-1.0000000E+01
6:
2 sph 7 0.0000000E+00
7:
3 sph 8 0.0000000E+00

7.5000000E+00 -7.5000000E+00 7.5000000E+00
1.0000000E+01
0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 9.9900000E+01
0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+02

In the last example, body number is defined by third column, first column is skipped by the non
declaration.

90

5.6 [ R e g i o n ] section
5.6.1 formats
In this section, CG geometry, importance (if necessary), volume (if necessary)、and density (ifnecessary) are define. Region number ―num‖, material number ―mat‖, region identification symbol ―sym‖,
region definition ―def‖, volume ―vol‖ (if necessary), importance ―imp‖ (if necessary), and density ―den‖(if necessary) are required for definition. Region numbers are from 1 to 9999.
The default order isnum mat sym def
You can change the order by using these symbols, but only the ―def‖ must be located at the last.
Mathematical expressions and user defined variable can not be used in the ―def‖. You can use the nonsymbol in order to skip columns.
In the case that the definition can not be written in a line, you can write in the next line without noadditional symbols at the end of line. Region identification symbol can not exceed 3 characters.
If there is no density definition here, densities in [Material] section is used. When density is defined
here, the densities in [Material] section are re-normalized. If you set density by positive value, unit isparticle density[1024 atoms/cm3], and negative value, mass density[g/cm3].
As the material number, you use the materi‖al number defined in [Material] section.
It is noticed that mat=―-1‖ and ―0‖ have special meanings. ―-1‖ means outer void, and ―0‖ means
inner void.
5.6.2 Examples
Some examples are shown below
List 5.12 ● region example (1)1: [ R e g i o n ]
2:
1
1 tgt
3:
2
2 iA5
4:
3
2 oA5
5:
4
2 iA2
6:
5
2 oA2

+1
-2 +3 +6 -7-3 +4 +6 -7-2 +3 +8 -9-3 +4 +8 -9

List 5.13 ● region example (2)1: [ R e g i o n ]2:num
mat imp3:
1
1 1.000000
4:2
2 2.000000
5:3
2 4.000000
6:4
2 8.000000
7:5
2 16.00000

vol1.000000
2.000000
1.000000
1.000000
3.000000

91

sym
tgt
iA5
oA5
iA2
oA2

def
+1
-2 +3 +6 -7-3 +4 +6 -7-2 +3 +8 -9-3 +4 +8 -9

List 5.14 ● region example (3)1: [ R e g i o n ]2:num
mat non3:
1
1 1.000000
4:2
2 2.000000
5:3
2 4.000000
6:4
2 8.000000
7:5
2 16.00000

non
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

sym
tgt
iA5
oA5
iA2
oA2

def
+1
-2 +3 +6 -7-3 +4 +6 -7-2 +3 +8 -9-3 +4 +8 -9

Examples (1) and (3) are same definition. If you want to cancel the importance definitions inexample (2), just change imp into non. When all importances are same, the importance function does notwork. The importance defined in this region section affects all particles.

925.7 [ C e l l ] section
5.7.1 Formats
The GG cell is defined in this section. Only C and $ can be used as a comment mark, but the # can
not be used as a comment mark here, since this character is used for the cell definition. File including andvariable definition can be used in this section. If you want to use continuing line, it is enough to put morethan 5 blanks at the line head instead of the line sequential mark at the end of line.
The order of the data is cell number, material number, material density, cell definition, and cellparameter as keyword style.
―LIKE n BUT‖ format can be used. ―U, TRCL, LAT, FILL, VOL, and TMP‖ can also be used as the
keyword style cell parameter. In addition, ―MAT and RHO‖ can be used in the ―LIKE n BUT‖.
Unit of material density is particle density [1024 atoms/cm3] when material density is given bypositive value, and mass density [g/cm3] when negative. Mathematical expressions and user defined
variables can be used in this material density definition. Cell number and material number can be usedfrom 1 to 9999
Formats and examples are shown below.

[Cell]
cell number mat. number

mat.

densitycell def.

_____cell number LIKE n BUT

cell parameter

93

cell parameter

Table 5-43: cell definition format
item

explanation

cell number

1～9999material number

0 for inner void, -1 for outer voidor material number defined in [material] section

material density

if cell is void, no input
positive value; particle density[1024 atoms/cm3]
negative value; mass density[g/cm3]
Particle densities given here renormalize a material densitydefined in[material] section.
Thus different density material, which has same composition with original
one, can be set in this section.
A new parameter matadd is prepared in order to add different material
number.

cell definition

cell definition cell geometry definition using surface number in the [surface]
and using the operator symbol ( ) : #LIKE n BUT

This cell is same with n cell, only parameters,
described after BUT, are different.

cell parameter

format; keyword=value
U, TRCL, LAT, FILL, VOL, TMP can be used as keyword.
In the LIKE n BUT, MAT and RHO can be used in addition.

5.7.2 Examples
List 5.15 ● [Cell] section example (1)1: [ C e l l ]2:
1 1 3.9279695E-02
3:
2 2 3.2932810E-02
4:
3 3 8.4759130E-02
5:
4 4 5.4744000E-05
6:
7:
5 -1

6 -9 -1
7 -9 1 -2
8 -9 2 -3
5 -10 -4
#1 #2 #3
-5 : 10 : 4

List 5.16 ● [Cell]section example (2)1: [ C e l l ]2:
1 0 -1 fill=1
3:
2 0 -4 u=1 lat=1 fill= 0:0 0:0 0:2 5 6 7
4:
5 0 -2 u=5 lat=1 fill= -1:1 0:0 0:0 3 2 3
5:
6 like 5 but u=6
6:
7 like 5 but u=77:
3 3 8.4759130E-04 3 u=28:
4 2 3.2932810E-02 -3 u=2
9: 13 3 8.4759130E-04 -3 u=3
94

10:
11:

14 2 3.2932810E-02 3 u=3
8 -1 +1

List 5.17 ● [Cell] section example (3)1: [ C e l l ]2:
2 1 9.03305e-02 11 -12 -133:
3 2 3.97300E-02 21 -22 23 -24 25 -26
4:
4 12 8.89397e-02 51 -52 -53
5:
5 4 9.99870e-02 52 -54 -53
6:
6 12 8.89397e-02 54 -55 -53
7:
10 15 6.40025e-02 11 -14 13 -16 :8:
14 -15 13 -17 :9:
15 -12 13 -16
10:
11 0
14 -15 -16 1711:
61 8 5.98037e-05 61 -62 63 -64 65 -66 trcl=(0 0 450) fill=1
12:62 like 61 but trcl=(0 0 610)13:
63 like 61 but trcl=(0 0 1190)
14:
64 like 61 but trcl=(0 0 1350)
15:
65 like 61 but trcl=(0 0 1920)
16:
66 like 61 but trcl=(0 0 2710)
17:
90 8 5.98037e-05 #( 101 -102 103 -104 105 -106)
18:
151 #250 #130
19:#( 191 -192 193 -202)
20:#( 191 -192 203 -212) u=1
21:......

95

5.8 [ S u r f a c e ] section
5.8.1 Formats
Surface is defined in this section. Only C and $ can be used as a comment mark, but # can not be
used as a comment mark here. The file including and variable definition can be set in this section. If you
want to use continuing line, it is enough to put more than 5 blanks at the line head instead of the line
sequential mark at the end of line.
The order of format is, surface number, coordinate transform number, surface symbol, and surface
definition. You can use mathematical expressions and user defined variables in the surface definition.
Surface definition by macro body can be used. Surface number is limited from 1 to 9999.
Formats and examples are shown below[Surface]
Surface number

transform number

surface symbol

surface definition

Table 5-44: surface definition format
item

explanation

surface number

1～9999coordinate transformnumber

if no coordinate transform, no input, else with coordinate transform, use
number n of TRn in [transform] section

surface symbol

surface symbol in surface card list, or symbol of macro bodysurface definition

1～15 inputs depends on surfaces

5.8.2 Examples
List 5.18 ● [Surface] section example (1)1: [Surface]
2:
1 cz
5.0
3:
2 cz
10.0
4:
3 cz
15.0
5:
4 cz
20.0
6:
5 pz
0.0
7:
6 pz
5.0
8:
7 pz
10.0
9:
8 pz
15.0
10:
9 pz
55.0
11:
10 pz
60.0

96

Table 5-45: surface card
surfacetype

explanation

equation

symbolP

input numeric
value

plane

multi-purpose

PX

vertical with

PY

X-axisPZ

vertical with

Ax  By  Cz  D  0
xD0
yD0
zD0

ABCD
D
D
D

Y-axisvertical with Z-axisSO

sphereorigin is centerS

multi-purpose

SX

center on X-axis

SY

center on Y-axis

SZ

center on Z-axis

C/Xcylinderparallel with

C/Y

X-axisC/Zparallel with

CX

Y-axisCY

parallel with Z-axis

CZ

on X-axis

x2  y2  z 2  R2  0( x  x ) 2  ( y  y) 2  ( z  z ) 2  R 2  0(x  x)2  y 2  z 2  R 2  0
x 2  ( y  y) 2  z 2  R 2  0
x 2  y 2  (z  z)2  R2  0( y  y) 2  ( z  z ) 2  R 2  0(x  x)2  (z  z)2  R 2  0( x  x ) 2  ( y  y) 2  R 2  0
y2  z 2  R2  0
x2  z 2  R2  0
x2  y2  R2  0

Rx y zR
xR
yR

zR
y zR
x zR
x yR
R
R
R

on Y-axis
on Z-axis
K/X

cone

parallel with

K/Y

X-axisK/Zparallel with

KX

Y-axisKY

parallel with Z-axis

KZ

on X-axis( y  y) 2  ( z  z ) 2  t ( x  x )  0( x  x ) 2  ( z  z ) 2  t ( y  y)  0( x  x ) 2  ( y  y) 2  t ( z  z )  0
y 2  z 2  t(x  x)  0
x 2  z 2  t ( y  y)  0
x 2  y 2  t(z  z )  0

x y z t2 ±1
x y z t2 ±1
x y z t2 ±1
x t2 ±1
y t2 ±1

z t2 ±1

on Y-axis±1 is only

on Z-axis

needed for 1
sheet code97

Table 5-46: surface card (continued)
surfacetype

explanation

equation

input numeric

ellipseparallel

hyperboloidwith X-, Y-A( x  x )  B( y  y )  C ( z  z ) 2D( x  x )  2E( y  y )  2F ( z  z )paraboloid

or Z-axis

G0cylindernon parallelcode ellipse

with X-, Y-

Ax 2  By 2  Cz 2  Dxy  Eyz  Fzx

hyperboloid

and Z-axis

symbol
SQ

GQ

value
2

2

2

ABCDE
FG x y z

ABCDE
FGHJK

 Gx  Hy  Jz  K  0paraboloid
TX
TY

ellipse torus

paralleltoruswith X-, Yor Z-axis

TZ

XY

defined by

ZP

points(x  x) 2 / B 2
 ( ( y  y ) 2  ( z  z ) 2  A) 2 / C 2  1  0( y  y) 2 / B 2
 ( ( x  x ) 2  ( z  z ) 2  A) 2 / C 2  1  0(z  z)2 / B 2
 ( ( x  x ) 2  ( y  y ) 2  A) 2 / C 2  1  0

98

x y zABCx y zABCx y zABC

5.8.3 Macro body
Table 5-47: macro body card
numerical
input

symboltype

BOXoptional BOX

Vx Vy Vz(all angles are 90°)

A1x A1y A1z

vector from base point to first surface

A2x A2y A2z

vector from base point to first surface

A3x A3y A3z

vector from base point to third surface

RPP

SPH

explanationbase point coordinate

rectangular solid

Xmin Xmax

minimum x and maximum x(each surface isYmin Ymax

minimum y and maximum yvertical with xyz)

Zmin Zmax

minimum z and maximum z

sphereVx Vy Vz

center coordinate(same with generalRradiussphere S)
RCC

cylinderVx Vy Vz

center coordinate of bottom face

Hx Hy Hz

vector from Vx Vy Vz to center coordinateRof top faceradius

RHP

optional

v1 v2 v3

base point coordinateorhexangular prismh1 h2 h3height vector from base point

HEX

prism

r1 r2 r3

vector from base point to first surface

s1 s2 s3

vector from base point to second surface

t1 t2 t3

vector from base point to third surface

5.8.4 Examples
List 5.19 ● [Surface] section example (2) corresponding the [cell] section example (2)1: [Surface]2:
1 rpp -15 15 -5 5 0 60
3:2 rpp -5 5 -5 5 0 20
4:4 rpp -15 15 -5 5 0 20
5:5 rpp -20 20 -5 5 0 40
6:
6 rpp -20 20 -5 5 0 20
7:
7 rpp -20 20 -5 5 40 60
8:
3 c/y 0 10 4
5.8.5 Surface definition by macro body
When you use a surface defined by a macro body in the cell definition, ―-‖ means inside of the macro
body and ―+‖ means outside of the macro body. Each surface composing a macro body, can be used in thecell definition. In that case, you should write macro body number with ―.‖ and surface number. Surface
number is shown below.

99

Table 5-48: surface number in macro bodysymbolsurface numberBOX1

surface vertical with the end of A1x A1y A1z

2

surface vertical with the origin of A1x A1y A1z

3

surface vertical with the end of A2x A2y A2z

4

surface vertical with the origin of A2x A2y A2z

5surface vertical with the end of A3x A3y A3z

6surface vertical with the origin of A3x A3y A3z

1

surface at Xmax

2

surface at Xmin

3

surface at Ymax

4

surface at Ymin

5

surface at Zmax

6

surface at Zmin

RPP

SPH
RCC

explanation

sphere surface
1

side face of cylinder2

surface vertical with the end of Hx Hy H + z

3surface vertical with the origin of Hx Hy H + z

RHP

1

surface vertical with the end of r1 r2 r3

or2

opposite face for surface 1

HEX

3

surface vertical with the end of s1 s2 s3

4

opposite face for surface 3

5

surface vertical with the end of t1 t2 t3

6

opposite face for surface 5

7

surface vertical with the end of h1 h2 h3

8surface vertical with the origin of h1 h2 h3100

5.9 [ T r a n s f o r m ] section
5.9.1 Formats
You can define the coordinate transform in this section. Only C and $ can be used as a comment
mark. File including and variable definition can be set in this section.
The coordinate transformation defined in this section can be used in [Source] section, [Surface]section, r-z, xyz mesh of tally and the magnetic field.
Formats and examples are shown below.

[Transform]
TRn
O 1 O 2 O 3 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6

B7 B8 B9M

Table 5-49: transform definition
item

explanationntransform number 1～999*TRn means that Bi is not a cosine but anangle.(degree)

O1 O 2 O3transposition vector

B1～ B9rotation matrix

M= 1 means that transposition vector is in sub
coordinate system defined in main coordinate
system.
=-1 means that transposition vector is in main
coordinate system defined in sub coordinate system.

Default values are shown below.
TRn0 0 0 10 0 0

1 0 0 0

1 1

5.9.2 Mathematical definition of the transform
The mathematical definition in terms of transposition vector and rotation matrix is the following, inthe case of M = 1,

 x'   B1   y'    B4
 z'   B   7B2B5B8B3  x   O1    
B6  y    O2 
B9  z   O3 101

in the case of M = -1,

 x'   B1  
 y '    B4
 z'   B   7B2B5B8B3  x   B1
  
B6  y    B2
B9  z   B3

B4
B5
B6

B7  O1  
B8  O2 
B9  O3 

Here,B1  cos( x' , x)
B2  cos( x' , y)B3  cos( x' , z )B4  cos( y' , x)
B5  cos( y' , y)B6  cos( y' , z )B7  cos( z ' , x)
B8  cos( z ' , y)B9  cos( z ' , z )5.9.3 Examples (1)List 5.20 ● [Transform] section example (1)1: [ T r a n s f o r m ]2: *tr1
0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 1.4000000E+02
3:1.3500000E+02 9.0000000E+01 4.5000000E+01
4:9.0000000E+01 0.0000000E+00 9.0000000E+01
5:2.2500000E+02 9.0000000E+01 1.3500000E+02
6:
7: *tr2
0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 2.5800000E+02
8:3.0000000E+02 9.0000000E+01 2.1000000E+02
9:9.0000000E+01 0.0000000E+00 9.0000000E+01
10:3.0000000E+01 9.0000000E+01 3.0000000E+02

1

1

In this example, ―tr1‖ rotates the coordinate by 135 degree around y axis, and transports 140 cm to z
direction, while ―tr2‖ rotates 300 degree around y axis, and transports 258 cm to z direction.
5.9.4 Examples (2)List 5.21 ● [Transform] section example (2)1: [ T r a n s f o r m ]2: set: c10[90] $ angle of around Z (degree)
3: set: c20[30] $ angle of around Y (degree)
4: set: c30[0] $ angle of around X (degree)
5:
6: tr1 0 0 0
7:cos(c10/180*pi)*cos(c20/180*pi)8:sin(c10/180*pi)*cos(c30/180*pi)+cos(c10/180*pi)*sin(c20/180*pi)*sin(c30/180*pi)9:sin(c10/180*pi)*sin(c30/180*pi)-cos(c10/180*pi)*sin(c20/180*pi)*cos(c30/180*pi)
10:-sin(c10/180*pi)*cos(c20/180*pi)
11:cos(c10/180*pi)*cos(c30/180*pi)-sin(c10/180*pi)*sin(c20/180*pi)*sin(c30/180*pi)
12:cos(c10/180*pi)*sin(c30/180*pi)+sin(c10/180*pi)*sin(c20/180*pi)*cos(c30/180*pi)
102

13:
14:
15:
16:

sin(c20/180*pi)-cos(c20/180*pi)*sin(c30/180*pi)
cos(c20/180*pi)*cos(c30/180*pi)
1

In this example, ―tr1‖ rotates the coordinate by ―c10‖ degree around z axis, ―c20‖ degree around yaxis and finally ―c30‖ degree around x axis. You can set ―c10, c20, c30‖, and rotate the coodinate to any
direction as you want.
5.10 Examples of repeated structures and lattices
Some examples for repeated structures and lattices are shown in Figures 6 and 7. These figures are
drawn by [T-Gshow] function.
Only mistakable definitions for ―LAT‖ are described here. When you use ―LAT‖, the rule fornumbering each component in ―LAT‖ depends on the order of the surface appeared in the cell definition
with ―LAT‖. You have to define it with the order described below. In the ―LAT‖, there are quadratic
prism by ―LAT=1‖ and hexangular prism by ―LAT=2‖. The orders for each prism are shown below.

Figure 5-6 Repeated structure
Only if you define the surface as above, the orders for components of LAT become as below.

Figure 5-7 Repeated lattice
These examples are xy-surface cases, so the surface definition for z component is at the last.
103

Above figures with the lattice coordinate are drawn by PHITS using [t-gshow] function with
―output=7‖ option for example 2 and 3.
5.10.1 Example 1
In this example, a prism including a cylinder at its center, which is defined by ―U‖, then it is moved
to three positions by ―TRCL‖.
List 5.22 ● Input for example 1
1: [ C e l l ]2: 1 0 -1 #2 #5 #6
3: 2 0 -21 22 -23 24 fill=1 trcl=1
4: 3 0 -10 u=1
5: 4 0#3 u=1
6: 5 like 2 but trcl=2
7: 6 like 2 but trcl=3
8: 7 -1
1
9:
10: [ S u r f a c e ]
11:
1
cz 45
12:
10
cz
6
13:
21
px 14
14:
22
px -14
15:
23
py 14
16:
24
py -1417:
18: [Transform]
19: *tr1 -20 -10 0
20: *tr2 5 22 0 40 130 90 50 40 90 90 90 0
21: *tr3 15 -15 0

Figure 5-8 Example 1 for LAT.
104

5.10.2 Example 2
Here, prisms including a cylinder at its center are put by lattice shape, using ―LAT=1‖. In thisexample, only 9 lattices have a cylinder and others do not have it. This is described from 3 to 5 lines. You
should take care of surface orderings for cell at number 2.
List 5.23 ● Input for example 2
1: [ C e l l ]2: 1 0 -1 fill=1
3: 2 0 -21 22 -23 24 lat=1 u=1
4:
fill=-2:2 -2:2 0:0
5:11111 12221 12221 12221
6:11111
7: 3 0 -10 u=2
8: 4 0#3 u=2
9: 7 -1
1
10:
11: [ S u r f a c e ]
12:
1
cz 45
13:
10
cz 6
14:
21
px 10
15:
22
px -10
16:
23
py 10
17:
24
py -10Figure 5-9 Example 2 for LAT.

5.10.3 Example 3
Here, hexangular prisms including a cylinder at center are put by lattice shape, using ―LAT=2‖. In
this example, only 7 lattices have a cylinder and others do not have it. This is described from 3 to 5 lines.
Some mathematical expressions and user defined variables are used in order to define a hexangular prism.
105You should take care of surface orderings for cell at number 2.
List 5.24 ● Input for example 3
1: [ C e l l ]2: 1 0 -1 fill=1
3: 2 0 -21 22 23 -24 25 -26 lat=2 u=1
4:
fill=-2:2 -2:2 0:0
5:11111 11221 12221 12211
6:11111
7: 3 0 -10 u=2
8: 4 0#3 u=2
9: 9 -1
1
10:
11: [ S u r f a c e ]
12:
1
cz 45
13:
10
cz 6
14: set: c1[15]15:21px [ c1*cos(pi/6)]
16:22px [-c1*cos(pi/6)]
19:
23
p[-tan(pi/6)] -1 0 [-c1]20:24p[-tan(pi/6)] -1 0 [ c1]17:25p[ tan(pi/6)] -1 0 [-c1]18:26p[ tan(pi/6)] -1 0 [ c1]Figure 10 Example 10 for LAT.
5.10.4 Example 4
In this example, hexangular prisms are put as lattice in the prisms of example 1, using U.

106

List 5.25 ● Input for example 4
1: [ C e l l ]2: 1 0 -1 #2 #6 #7
3: 2 0 -21 22 -23 24 fill=1 trcl=1
4: 3 0 -31 32 33 -34 35 -36 lat=2 u=1 fill=2
5: 4 0 -10 u=2
6: 5 0#4 u=2
7: 6 like 2 but trcl=2
8: 7 like 2 but trcl=3
9: 8 -1
1
10:
11: [ S u r f a c e ]
12:
1
cz 45
13:
10
cz 2
14:
21
px 14
15:
22
px -14
16:
23
py 14
17:
24
py -1418: set: c1[5]19:31px [ c1*cos(pi/6)]
20:32px [-c1*cos(pi/6)]
23:
33
p[-tan(pi/6)] -1 0 [-c1]24:34p[-tan(pi/6)] -1 0 [ c1]21:35p[ tan(pi/6)] -1 0 [-c1]22:36p[ tan(pi/6)] -1 0 [ c1]
25:
26: [transform]
27: *tr1 -20 -10 0
28: *tr2 5 22 0 40 130 90 50 40 90 90 90 0
29: *tr3 15 -15 0

Figure 5-11 Example 4 for LAT.

107

5.11 [ I m p o r t a n c e ] section
The importance for the CG region and the GG cell can be defined in this section. The importance canbe also defined in [Region] section , but defined importance in this section has higher priority than ones in[Region]. The [Region] importances are ignored if the importance is defined in both. If the importance is
not defined, it is set as ―1.0‖. In the [Region] section, the importance is defined only for all particles, but
you can set importance for individual particle by this section.
Maximum 6 [Importance] sections are allowed to be defined in a input file.

[Importance]
part = proton neutron
reg
imp
1
1.000000
11
5.000000({2-5}89)2.000000( 11 12 15 )
3.000000( 6<10[1 0 0]<u=3 )6.000000....
........
....
........

Particle is defined as ―part =‖ at the first line. If the ―part‖ is not defined, default value is defined as―part = all‖. The format to describe particles is the same as in tally definition. However, it can distinguish―ityp‖ only, each nucleus is not specified.
If you want to change the order of region number ―reg‖ and ―imp‖, set as ―imp reg ‖. You can use theskip operator ―non‖. Even if you use the GG, you should write not ―cell‖ but ―reg‖ here.
You can use the format like ( | 2 - 5 | 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe styles as ( 6 <10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by ( ) if it is not a single numeric value.
The importance of bottom level is a product by each importance at each level. In PHITS , importanceof a specific cell at bottom level can be defined by above format. By using the format, we can define
different importance into each lattice. If the importance is double-defined, the first defined importance isvalid.
If you set large importance to particles which have strong penetration through matter such as
neutrino, PHITS calculation takes time too much. If you define ―part=all‖, neutrino is not included. You
must give attention about it.
Some rules can be used to define an importance of a cell in a repeated structures and lattices. For
example, ―cells 5, 6, and 7‖ on a bottom level are included by ―cells 11, 12, and 13‖ on upper level, we
can define the importance as
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:

[ Importance ]reg( 5 6 7 < 11 )( 5 6 7 < 12 )( 5 6 7 < 13 )

imp
2.0
4.0
8.0
108

6:

( 11 12 13 )

1.0

or

1: [ Importance ]
2:
reg
imp
3:
(567)
1.0
4:
11
2.0
5:
12
4.0
6:
13
8.0
Above two definitions give same results, but in the latter case, the importance for ―cells 5, 6, and 7‖
are displayed as 1.0 at the importance summary.

109

5.12 [WeightWindow ] section
The weight window function can be defined in this section. Maximum 6 [Weight window] sections
are allowed to be defined in a input file.

[ Weight Window ]part = proton neutroneng = 5( tim = 5 )6.00e-7 3.98e-1 1.00e+0 7.00e+0 5.00e+4
reg
ww1
ww2
ww3
1
0.010000 0.100000 0.001000
110.005000 0.050000 0.000300({2 - 5} 8 9 )0.001000 0.010000 0.000100( 11 12 15 )
0.000500 0.005000 0.000030( 6<10[1 0 0]<u=3 ) 0.000010 0.001000 0.000010....
........ ........ ........
ww4
ww5
0.010000 0.100000
0.005000 0.050000
0.001000 0.010000
0.000500 0.005000
0.000010 0.001000........ ........

Particle is defined in the first line as ―part =‖ . ―part = all‖ means all particles. The format to describe
particles ―part =‖ is the same format as in tally definition. However, it can distinguish ―ityp‖ only, eachnucleus is not specified.
Next you define the energy mesh or time mesh. First, you define the number of mesh by ―eng =‖ or―tim =‖ and, in next line, the values of each mesh (e1; e2; e3; ::::). Minimum value of weight window foreach mesh should be defined in the followings. Each minimum values are like ―ww1, ww2, ww3, ....‖
where ―wwi‖ is a window minimum value for a mesh ―ei-1 < E < ei. e0 = 0 and t0 = _-∞‖ is assumed. If
there exists no ―eng =‖ or ―tim =‖ definitions, energy or time meshs are not prepared. In this case, you
should set only ―ww1‖.
Region number ―ref‖ must be written at the first column. As above example, you can make anothertable for ―wwi‖ definitions. From second table, the region definition can be skipped as the example. You
can use the skip operator ―non‖ in this section. Even if you use GG, you should write the symbol not―cell‖ but ―reg‖ in the section.
You can use the format ( {2 - 5 } 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[1 0
0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by ( ) if it is not a single numeric value.
If you set large weight window to particles which has strong penetration through matter such as
neutrino, PHITS calculation takes time too much. If you define part=all, neutrino is included. You must
give attention about it.

110

5.13 [ V o l u m e ] section
Volume of region for CG region and of cell for GG (cm3) can be defined in this section. The volume
can be also set at [Region] section by CG. If the volume is double defined, the value defined in this[Volume] section is used. The volume is utilized in the tally sections. If you do not set volume, it has 1.0
cm3 volume.

[Volume]reg
1
11( {2 - 5} 8 9 )( 11 12 15 )
16
....
....

vol
1.000000
5.000000
2.000000
3.000000
6.000000........
........

You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ) for a group. In this case, you need to close a value by ( ) if it
is not a single numeric value.
You can not use the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). If you want to set cellvolume in detail, use the volume definition in the tally section.
If you want to change the order of region number ―reg‖ and volume ―vol‖, you can set as ―vol reg ‖.
You can use the skip operator ―non‖. Even if you use GG, you should write the symbol not ―cell‖ but―reg― here.
5.14 [ T e m p e r a t u r e ] section
Free-Gas Thermal Temperature (MeV) for CG region and GG cell can be defined in this section.
This section corresponds to TMP card but you can not set time definition. This value can be set in the[Cell] section when you use GG. If the temperature is doublly defined, temperatures defined in this[Temperature] sections is used. If you do not set this, the default value is 2:53×10-8MeV.

[Temperature]reg
111({2-5}89)( 11 12 15 )
16
....
....

tmp
1.0*1.e-8
5.0*1.e-8
2.0*1.e-8
3.0*1.e-8
6.0*1.e-8........
........

You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ). In this case, you need to close a value by ( ) if it is not asingle numeric value.
You can not use the lattice and universe styles as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ).
111

If you want to change the order of region number (reg) and temperature (tmp), you can set as ―tmpreg‖. You can use the skip operator non. Even if you use GG, you should write the symbol not ―cell‖ but―reg‖ here.
5.15 [ Brems Bias ] section
Energy bias of the bremsstrahlung process can be defined for each material in this section. This
corresponds the BBREM card.
In the bremsstrahlung process, many low energy photons are generated. In case that you areinterested in high energy photon, you can define bias for each energy in order to improve statistics forinterest energy region.

[ Brems Bias ]material = all or number of materials
m1 m2 m3 ........
numbias{1-45}
1.0
46
2.0
47
3.0
48
4.0
49
5.0

First, you define the material for bias setting. If you set all, the next line is not necessary, else if you
set numerical value, material numbers for the value should be listed in the next line.
Biases should be defined for the group from 1 to 49. Large number corresponds to high energy. The
bias is relative value.
If you want to replace the order of group number ―num‖ and bias ―bias‖, you can set as ―bias num‖.
You can use the skip operator ―non‖.
5.16 [ PhotonWeight ] section
Photon production weight for CG region and GG cell can be defined in this section. This corresponds
the PWT card.
When the photon production weight Wi for cell i takes positive value, photon is generated if its
weight is larger than Wi×Is=Ii. Unless, the photon is treated by the Russian roulette method. In this caseIs and Ii is the importance of neutron for source and creation point cells.
In the case the photon production weight Wi for cell i takes negative value, photon is generated if its
weight takes larger than Wi×Ws×Is=Ii. Unless, the photon is treated by the Russian roulette. In this case
Ws is a weight of neutron before nuclear reaction.
If Wi = 0, 1 photon is generated by neutron reaction. If Wi = -1.0e6, photon creation is ignored in thecell. By the default, Wi = -1.

112

[ Photon Weight ]reg
1
11({2-5}89)( 11 12 15 )
16
....
....

pwt
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.1
0.9
........
........

You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ). In this case, you need to close a value by ( ) if it is not asingle numeric value.
You can not use the lattice and universe styles as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ).
If you want to change the order of region number ―reg‖ and weight ―pwt‖, you ca set as ―pwt reg‖.
You can use the skip operator ―non‖. Even if you use GG, you should write the symbol not ―cell‖ but―reg‖.
5.17 [ Forced Collisions ] section
The forced collisions is used for improving tally statistics or thin target analysis by enlarging thecollision probabilities. When specified particle comes into a region defined as the forced collision region,
the particle is divided into two particles. One has a weight by (penetration probability)×(its weight), thisparticle pass through to the next region. The other has a weight of (1 - penetration probability)×(itsweight), and it is forced to collide with a target in the region. The collide position is decided by crosssections and random number. Regions and factors for the forced collisions can be defined in this section.
Non-defined regions are set factor zero.
Maximum 6 [forced collisions] sections are allowed to be defined in a input file.

[ Forced Collisions ]part = proton neutron
reg
fcl
1
1.000000
110.500000({2-5}89)0.200000( 11 12 15 )0.300000( 6<10[1 0 0]<u=3 )-0.500000....
........
....
........

You set particle as ―part =‖ in the first line. The default is ―part = all‖. ―part =‖ is the same format as
in tally definition.
If you want to replace the order of region number ―reg‖ and ―fcl‖, you can set as ―fcl reg‖. You can
use the skip operator ―non‖. Even if you use GG, you should write the symbol not ―cell‖ but ―reg‖ here.
You can use the format ( | 2 - 5 | 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe styles as ( 6 < 10[1 0113

0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by ( ) if it is not a single numeric value. By using this format you
can set different forced collision factor for each lattice. If the same cell is re-defined, the value, which isdefined at first, is used.
The forced collision factor ―fcl‖ means, 0: no forced collision, |f cl| > 1: is an error, and |f cl| < 1 :multiply forced collision probability by ―f cl”, instead the weight is reduced by 1/ f cl times.
We have two options between the multi scattering and the weight cut off in the forced collision
region. When ―f cl < 0‖, secondary particles produced by forced collisions are treated by the normal
process. In this case, weigh cut off is not performed. When ―f cl > 0‖, the forced collision is also applied
to secondary particles. In this case weight cut off is performed. Even if a particle is killed by this weightcut off, of course the particle is tallied before killed.
There is a possibility that all particles are killed by this weight cut off if you set the weight cut off
and the forced collisions without consideration. You should give attention about it.
5.18 [ M a g n e t i c F i e l d ] section
5.18.1 Charged particles
You can set a magnetic field in the PHITS calculation. Region or cell number ―reg‖, magnetic field
type ―typ‖, half distance of magnets ―gap‖(cm), magnetic field intensity ―mgf‖, transformation ―trcl‖ andtime dependence ―time‖ should be defined as[ Magnetic Field ]
reg
typ
gap
1
4
10.00000
2
410.00000
3
2
10.00000
42
10.00000( 150 < 61 )4
13.00000( 150 < 62 )4
13.00000( 150 < 63 )4
13.00000( 150 < 64 )4
13.00000( 150 < 65 )4
13.00000( 150 < 66 )4
13.00000...
...
........
........
...
...
........
........

mgf-5.956540
6.416140-7.611980
3.516000
7.880140-7.440800
9.441010-8.295220
3.694830-2.099350
...
...

trcl
3
1
0
0
2
2
2
2
2
2

time
non
non
0.0
pi/2
non
non
non
non
non
non

...
...

The column of ―trcl‖ is omissible. The zero for ―trcl‖ means no transformation. The time is aparemeter of user defined time dependent magnetic field. The column of time is also omissible. The ‖non‖for time means no time dependece. Two subroutines, usrmgt1.f and usrmgt2.f are included in the source
as user defined subroutines for the time dependent magnetic field. The former is for Wobbler magnet, andthe latter is for pulse magnet for neutron optics. You can choose these two subroutine by ―usrmgt=1, 2‖ inthe parameter section. For the Wobbler magnet, ‖time‖ means phase of the magnet, starting time for pulse
magnet, respectively.
In the above expression, ―reg‖ is region number, ―typ‖ can take 2 or 4 for dipole electromagnet, or
quadrupole electromagnet respectively. ―mgf‖ denotes the strength of the magnetic field (kG), and ―trcl‖
114

is the coordinate transformation number defined in [transform] section.
You can use the format ( | 2 - 5 | 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[1 0
0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by ( ) if it is not a single numeric value.
By using this format, you can set different magnetic field for each lattice. If a cell is re-defined, thevalue, which is defined at first, is used.
In the case of dipole magnet, the distance gap make no sense, but set any numeric. The magnetic
field is available not only in the void region, but also in the material where the normal reaction can be
occurred.
z-axis is assumed to be the center of the magnetic field. The direction of the magnetic field is
positive direction of y-axis for dipole, i.e. the positive charge particle is bent to positive direction of x-axis
when it goes to positive direction of z-axis. For quadrupole, the positive particle is converged in x-axis,
diverged in y-axis when it goes to positive direction of z-axis. You need the coordinate transformation bytrcl for different geometrical situation.
5.18.2 Neutron
The definition of the magnetic field for neutron is almost the same as for charged particles. Here we
describe the detail of the magnetic field for neutron.

[ Magnetic Field ]
reg
typ
gap
1
60
0.00000
261
0.00000
3106
5.00000
4104
0.00000
5102
0.00000
6101
3.00000
7103
0.00000... ...
........
........
... ...
........
........

mgf
35000.035000.07130.03.5
0.20
7130.035000.0
...
...

trcl
3
1
0
0
0
2
0
...
...

polar
non
1
0
non
non
1
-1

time
non
non
non
5.0
non
non
non

...
...

We can not take into account of the gravity nor additional dipole magnet. For 60 case, it is assumed
that the spin always keep parallel or anti-parallel to the magnet field. For 61 case, we solve the coupledequation of motion between the spin and the magnetic field. Then the spin flip can be occurred in theregion with week magnetic field. The strength of the magnetic field is specified in the unit of [T/m2] in―mgf‖ column.
For the types above 100, we consider the coupled equations of the spin and the magnetic field. In
addition, the effects of the gravity and additional dipole field can be taken into account. 106 is sextupole,
104 quadrupole, and 102 dipole, respectively. The strength of additional quadrupole magnet (z-direction)is give by the column of gap in the unit of [T].
For 101 type, the magnetic field is defined by the user program file, usrmgf1.f. In this user program,the data measured by the neutron optics group in JAERI is read from the file and used the calculation. The
strength of this field is renormarized by the value of ―mgf‖.
115

For 101 type, the magnetic field is also defined by the user program file, usrmgf3.f. In this user
program, there is a simple sextupole magnet field as same as in 106 type.
The neutron goes into the magnetic field with the initial spin if it is defined in the source section. If
not, the initial spin is defined at the moment when the neutron goes into the magnetic field. The ratio of
the number of parallel and anti-parallel spin to the magnetic field is determined by the polarization
defined by the polar column. non in polar column means 0 polarization. The polarization is defined asP       (1)Here, + and- are the number of the parallel and anti-parallel particles.
5.19 [ C o u n t e r ] section
The counter function can be defined in this section. Three counters can be used in tally sections. The
counter is activated when (1) a particle comes into specified region, (2) a particle goes out specified
region, (3) a particle takes scattering in specified region, and (4) a particle reflects back on a certain
boundary of the region. You can set one progress value of the counter from -9999 to 9999, or zero set(10000). Counter values are attached to particles. Secondary particle produced in the collisions have thesame counter value of parent. Capacity of the counter is from -9999 to 9999. Counter changes only thisrange. You can set the counter for each particle by using ―part =‖ definition, and you can exclude someparticles from the counter actions by ―*part =‖ definition.

[ C o u n t e r ]counter = 1
part = neutron proton
reg
in
out
coll
ref
1
1 10000
00
11
1 10000
00
counter = 2*part = proton deuteron triton 3he alpha nucleus
reg
in
out
coll
( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 )-1
01
counter = 3
part = 208Pb
regcoll( 11 12 15 )5
( 6<10[1 0 0]<u=3 )100....
........
....
........

If you want to change the order of region number ―reg‖, ―in‖, ―out‖, ―coll‖, and ―ref‖, set as ―reg collin out ref‖. You can use the skip operator non. At least one must be defined in the ―in out coll ref‖. If
nothing is defined, it is assumed no counter. Numeric gives one progress value of the counter. 1000 means
zero set. The initial counter value of source particle is zero.
You can use the format ( | 2 - 5 | 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe styles as ( 6 < 10[1 0116

0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by ( ) if it is not a single numeric value.
In the definition of ―part =‖ , you can specify particles up to 20 particles. For nucleus, you can use
the expression like 208Pb and Pb. The later case, Pb, denotes all isotopes of Pb.
5.20 [ Reg Name ] section
Region names and size for graphic output by gshow and 3dshow tallies are defined in this section.
By default, region name is the region number.

[ Reg Name ]
reg
1
2
3
4
{5-8}
....
....

name
cover
body
{cell 2}{cell 3}tube........
........

size
1
0.5
2
2
3

If you want to replace the order of region number ―reg‖, ―name‖, and ―size‖, set as ―reg size name‖.
You can use the skip operator non. At least one must be defined in the ―name size‖. If nothing is defined,
it is assumed to be default. You can use the format { 4 - 7 }, but the ( { 4 - 7 } 9 10 ) format can not be
used. If you need to use blanks in name definition, the name must be closed by || as the example. If you
want to use ( ), you should write n( n). In the name, you cannot use { }.
5.21 [ Mat Name Color ] section
Material names, size and colors for graphical output by gshow and 3dshow tallies are defined in thissection. By default, the name is set as material number and the color is set automatically.

[ Mat Name Color ]
mat
0
1
2
3
{4-7}
....
....

name
void
air
{mat 2}{mat 3}Fe........
........

size
1
0.5
2
2
3

color
lightgrayyellowgreen
orangeyellow{ 0.067 0.600 1.00 }mossgreen

If you want to replace the order of material number ―mat‖, ―name‖, ―size‖, and ―color‖, set as ―matcolor size name‖. You can use the skip operator ―non‖. You must define at least one parameter in ―name‖and ―color‖. If no definition, the default values are used.
You can use the format | 4 - 7 |, but the ( | 4 - 7 | 9 10 ) format can not be used. If you need to use
blanks in name definition, the name must be closed by | | as the example. If you want to use ( ), you
117should write n( n). In the name, you cannot use | | . The color definition is based on the format in ANGEL .
Set color by symbol ( r bbb yy), name ( red orange blue), or HSB numeric H(hue) S (chroma)B(brightness). In the case HSB numeric definition, close each numeric by f g. If only one HSB numeric isdefined, chroma and brightness are set 1.
Color symbols, names, and HSB numerics are shown from the next page.

118

Table 5-50: gray scale

Table 5-52: Color definition by names and HSB
numerics

Table 5-51: Color definition by symbols

1195.22 [ Mat Time Change ] section
By this section, you can change the material of certain cells to the other material as a function of time.
This function is useful to describe a shutter of beam line, T0 chopper and the other devices for neutron
optics. The unit of time is nsec.

[ Mat Time Change ]
mat
1
2
3
....
....

time
50.0
100.0
1000.0........
........

change11
120

In the above example, the material 1 is changed to material 11 at t=50.0 nsec, 2 to 12 at 100 nsec and
3 to void at 1000 nsec. If you want to replace the order of the initial material ―mat‖, time ―time‖ and thefinal material ―change‖, set as ‖mat change time‖. You can use the skip operator ―non‖. These threecolumns are always necessay to define the‖ mat‖ time change function.

120

5.23 [ Super Mirror ] section
The reflection of low energy neutron by super mirror is defined by this section. We assume thefollowing empirical formula to describe the reflectivity of the super mirrors.

R0R  1R0 (1  tanh(Q  mQc ) / W )(1   (Q  Qc ))2

If Q < Qc
If Q > Qc

where Q is the length of the scattering vector (in Å-1) defined byQ  ki  k f 4 sin 

The value of m is a parameter determined by the mirror material, the bilayer sequence and thenumber of bilayers.
Qc is the critical scattering wave vector for a single layer of the mirror material. At higher values ofQ, the reflectivity starts falling linearly with a slope  until a cutoff at Q = mQc. The width of the cutoff isdenoted by W.
These parameters are defined as[ Super Mirror ]r-in{2001-2020}
2500
2600
....
....
....

r-out
mm r0
qc
am
3001
3
0.99 0.0217 3.03500
30.99 0.0217 3.03600
30.99 0.0217 3.0....
.. ... ....
... ...
....
.. ... ....
... ...
....
..
... ....
... ...

wm
0.003
0.003
0.003

The reflection surface is defined by the surface between r-in and r-out. You can use the format ( { 2 5 } 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe styles as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ) in these definitions. The
remaining parameters in above expression denote m (mm), R0 by r0, Qc by qc in Å-1,  by am in Å, and W
by wm in Å-1.
We restrict this function only to neutrons for the case that its energy is less than 10 eV or sin isgreater than 0.001, the latter is due to roughness of the surface.

1215.24 [ Elastic Option ] section
In this section, you can set some parameters for user defined elastic option for low energy neutrons.
By this function, you can chage angle distributions of elastic collisions of data based neutron reactions.
We prepare two sample routines, usrelst1.f and usrelst2.f. You can choose one of these two by usrelst=1,
2 in the parameter section. You should define the regions to which this function is applied and 4
parameters as,[ Elastic Option ]
reg
1
2
3
....
....

c1
5
1
3
...
...

c2
1
1
1
...
...

c3
3.3
1.1
0.3
...
...

...
...

c4
0.4
0.7
0.8

If you want to replace the order of region number (reg), (c1 c2 c3 c4), set as ―reg c3 c2 c1 c4‖. You
can use the skip operator ―non‖. You can use the format | 4 - 7 |, but the ( | 4 - 7 | 9 10 ) format can not be
used.
The sample routine of usrelst1.f is for Bragg scattering based on the data base, and usrelst2.f for any
type of angular distribution described by an analytic formula.
5.25 [ T i m e r ] section
The timer function can be defined in this section. The timer controls the time of each particle when
(1) a particle comes into specified region, (2) a particle goes out specified region, (3) a particle takes
scattering in specified region, and (4) a particle reflects back on certain boundary of the region. You can
set the time to be zero(-1), stopped(1) or nothing(0).

[Timer]
reg
1
11
....
....

in
0
1
....
....

out
-1
0
....
....

coll

ref
0
0
....
....

0
0
....
....

If you want to replace the order of region number ―reg‖, ―in‖, ―out‖, ―coll‖, and ―ref‖, set as ―reg collin out ref‖. You can use the skip operator non. At least one must be defined in the ―in out coll ref‖. If
nothing is defined, it is assumed no action.
You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[1 0
0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by ( ) if it is not a single numeric value.

122

6 Common parameters for tallies
PHITS has the following tally functions.
Table 6-1: Tally sections
nameexplanation[T-Track]

Track length tally definition[T-Cross]

Surface crossing tally definition[T-Yield]

Produced nuclei tally definition[T-Heat]Heat tally definition[T-Time]Time tally definition[T-Star]Star density tally definition[T-DPA]

DPA tally definition[T-Product]

Produced particle tally definition[T-LET]LET tally definition[T-Deposit]

DEPOSIT tally definition[T-Deposit2]

DEPOSIT2 tally definition[T-SED]

SED tally definition[T-Gshow]

Graphical region boundary plot definition[T-Rshow]

Graphical physical quantity region plot definition[T-3dshow]

3D show definition

Common parameters used in these tallies are described below.
6.1 Geometrical mesh
In the tallies shown by Table 6-1, CG and GG region mesh ―reg‖, r-z scoring mesh ―r-z‖, and xyz
scoring mesh ―xyz‖ can be used for geometrical mesh of tallying area.
You can choose one mesh frommesh ={ reg, r-z, xyz }6.1.1 Region mesh
The region mesh defined by the region number or the cell number can be written bymesh = reg
reg = 1 2 3 4 5 ( 10 11 ) 50

123

Each region number or cell number is separated by blank. If you want to combine some regions, use( ).
The following format can be used for defining sequential region numbers.

mesh = reg
reg = { 1 - 5 } ( 10 11 )( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 )In the format {n1 - n2} (n1 is smaller than n2), you can specify regions from n1 to n2. You can’t
specify like ( n1 - n2 ). Styles ( { } ) and ( all ) can be used, but { ( ) } can not be used. You can use thelattice and universe styles as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). By using above format, you can tally from eachlattice individually. And if you set region as ―reg = all‖, all regions become tallying region. However cells,
which do not belong to bottom level, is not included.
6.1.2 Definition the region and volume for repeated structures and lattices
When you define regions including repeated structures and lattices, you must close your definition by( ) . A level structure is indicated by ―<‖. In the case an intermediate level has the lattice structure, you
can specify lattices using [ ] after the cell number as 160[1:2 3:6 1:1]. In this example, lattices, whichfrom 1 to 2 in x direction, 3 to 6 in y direction, and 1 in z direction, are defined. Or you can specify
individually as 160[1 3 4, 2 3 4, 3 3 4]. The style ( ) in one level can be used to combine some regions.
See next example.
List 6.1 ● mesh = reg example (1)1:mesh = reg
2:reg = (all)3:({ 201 - 205 })4:( 161 < 160[1:2 3:6 1:1] )5:( (201 202 203 204) < (161 162 163 ) )6:( ( 90 100 ) 120 < 61 ( 62 63 ) )This region mesh definition is echoed as
List 6.2 ● mesh = reg example (2)1:mesh = reg# mesh type is region-wise2:
reg = ( all ) ( { 201 - 205 } ) ( 161 < 160[ 1:2 3:6 1:1 ] ) ( (3:{ 201 - 204 } ) < ( { 161 - 163 } ) ) ( ( 90 100 ) 120 < 61
4:
( 62 63 ) )5:volume# combined, lattice or level structure
6:
non regvol# reg definition
7:
1 10001 8.1000E+01 # ( all )8:
2 10002 5.0000E+00 # ( ¥{ 201 - 205 ¥} )9:
3 10003 1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 1 3 1 ] )10:
4 10004 1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 2 3 1 ] )11:
5 10005 1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 1 4 1 ] )12:
6 10006 1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 2 4 1 ] )13:
7 10007 1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 1 5 1 ] )14:
8 10008 1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 2 5 1 ] )15:
9 10009 1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 1 6 1 ] )16:
10 10010 1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 2 6 1 ] )17:
11 10011 4.0000E+00 # ( ( { 201 - 204 } ) < ( { 161 - 163 } ) )18:
12 10012 2.0000E+00 # ( ( 90 100 ) < 61 )
124

19:
20:
21:

13 10013
14 10014
15 10015

1.0000E+00 # ( 120 < 61 )2.0000E+00 # ( ( 90 100 ) < ( 62 63 ) )1.0000E+00 # ( 120 < ( 62 63 ) )In the input, it looks only 5 regions defined, but in the input echo, you can see 15 regions are definedfor tally. In this input echo, region numbers are defined automatically starting from 10001, and thevolume of each cell are set 1 because of no [volume] definition.
We explain the detail of 15 regions appears in the volume description of this input echo.
First for ( all ), 81 cells are defined in the bottom level, so the volume of ( all ) is set 81. If thevolume of the cell is defined correctly in the [volume] section, you don’t need to define the volume here
again.
Next for ({ 201 - 205 }), this combined region has volume 5 in the echo, since this combined regions
have 5 cells of bottom level. This is also not required to re-define here if the volume is set in the[volume]section.
For ( 161 < 160[1:2 3:6 1:1] ), the region 161 is included as a lattice in region 160. In this expression,
8 lattices of the region 160 from 1 to 2 in x direction, 3 to 6 in y direction, and 1 in z direction, are used
for the tally. In the echo, the number of regions in bottom level is echoed 1. In the case, you have to
specify the volume by yourself by the volume definition below.
For ( (201 202 203 204) < (161 162 163 ) ), some regions are defined in each level, but these are all
closed by ( ), so it means one region as a whole. In this case, given volume by the echo is not correct, so
set volume manually by the volume definition below.
For ( ( 90 100 ) 120 < 61 ( 62 63 ) ), there are two independent regions in each level, so 4 regions aredefined here. In this case given volume by the echo is not correct too, so set volume manually in the[volume] section.
You can set volume as below.

mesh = reg
reg = 1 2 3 4 ( 5 < 12 ) ( {13 - 17} )volumereg
vol1
1.000025.000036.000041.000010001
6.000010002
5.0000In above example, region numbers from 1 to 4 are set normally as you can see, but regions ( 5 < 12 )and ( |13 – 17| ) have numbers 10001 and 10002. These big values are given in an input echo
automatically. You can see and paste this settings from the input echo.
If you want to change the order of region number ―reg‖ and volume ―vol‖, set as ―vol reg‖. You can
use the skip operator ‖non‖.
In the input echo, numbered entry is given in ―non‖ column. When ―axis = reg‖, the numbered entry
is used as a value of X axis. Even if you use GG, use the symbol not ―cell‖ but ―reg‖ here.
125

When you define regions in the bottom level, set same region twice as ( 3000 < 3000[1:2 3:61:1] ) .
6.1.3 r-z mesh
When you use the r-z scoring mesh, first, offsets for x and y coordinate of the center of cylinder canbe defined asmesh = r-zx0 = 1.0y0 = 2.0

This can be omissible. Then, define r and z mesh asmesh = r-zr-type = [1-5]..........
..........
z-type = [1-5]..........
..........

Mesh definition is described later.
6.1.4 xyz mesh
When you use the xyz scoring mesh, set x, y, and z mesh asmesh = xyz
x-type = [1-5]..........
..........
y-type = [1-5]..........
..........
z-type = [1-5]..........
..........

Mesh definition is described later.
6.2 Energy mesh
Energy mesh begins as
e-type = [1-5]..........
..........
126‖e1-type‖ and ‖e2-type‖ are also used in DEPOSIT2 tally. Mesh definition is described later.
6.3 LET mesh
LET mesh begins asl-type = [1-5]..........
..........

Mesh definition is described later.
6.4 Time mesh
Time mesh is defined ast-type = [1-5]..........
..........

Mesh definition is described later.
6.5 Angle mesh
Angle mesh in cross tally is defined asa-type = [1, 2, -1, -2]..........
..........

If ―a-type‖ is defined by positive number, this mesh denotes cosine mesh. If ―a-type‖ is defined bynegative number, the mesh deontes angle mesh. Mesh definition is described later.
6.6 Mesh definition
There are 8 kinds of mesh definition as ―e-type, t-type, x-type, y-type, z-type, r-type, a-type andl-type‖. The format is common for every mesh types. So only the ―e-type‖ definition is described below.
For other types, replace ―e‖ into ―t‖, ―x‖, ―y‖, ... and ―a‖. For example, replace ―ne‖ as ―nt, nx, ny, ... , na‖,―emin‖ as ―tmin, xmin, ymin, ... , amin‖, and so on.

6.6.1 Mesh type
You can use 5 kinds of mesh type as shown below.
127

Table 6-2: mesh typemesh type

explanation

1

give number of groups and mesh points by data

2

give number of groups, minimum and maximum values.
mesh is divided equally by linear scale.

3

give number of groups, minimum and maximum values.
mesh is divided equally by log scale.

4

give mesh width, minimum and maximum values.
mesh points are given by linear scale.
Number of groups is set automatically as resulting maximum value becomes samewith given value, or takes larger value with small excess as possible.

5

give minimum and maximum values and log value of mesh width
mesh points are given by log scale.
Number of groups is set automatically as resulting maximum value becomes samewith given value, or takes larger value with small excess as possible.

It is noted that you can use only 1, 2 (-1, -2) mesh types in a-type definition. Each mesh type format
is shown in followings.
6.6.2 e-type = 1
When you use ―e-type=1‖, set number of group, then numerical data ase-type = 1
ne = number of groupdata(1) data(2) data(3) data(4)data(5) data(6) data(7) data(8).........
.........
data(ne+1)

You can use multi lines without any symbols for line connection.
6.6.3 e-type = 2, 3
When you use ―e-type = 2, 3‖, set number of group, minimum value, and maximum vale ase-type = 2, 3
ne = number of groupemin = minimum value
emax = maximum value

1286.6.4 e-type = 4
When you use ―e-type=4‖, set mesh width, minimum value, and maximum value ase-type = 4
edel = width of meshemin = minimum value
emax = maximum value

6.6.5 e-type = 5
When you use ―e-type= 5‖, set mesh width, minimum value, and maximum value ase-type = 5
edel = log( width of mesh )emin = minimum value
emax = maximum value

In the case, mesh width is for log scale, i.e., ―edel = log( Mi+1 / Mi )‖.
6.7 Other tally definitions
6.7.1 Particle definition
You can define particles aspart = proton neutron pion+ 3112 208Pb

orpart = protonpart = neutron
part = pion+
part = 3112
part = 208Pb

See Table 4 for particle identification. You can also use the kf code number.
If you define all particles aspart = all

Maximum 6 particles can be define in a tally. If you want to tally more particles, use another tally
sections of the same kind of tally.
129

If you want to tally some particles as a group, you can use ( ) as the following. The maximum
number incide the ( ) is 6.

part = ( proton neutron ) all pion+ 3112 208Pb

In this case, as the first group, the sum of proton and neutron contribution is tallied, the second is thesum of all. 5 groups of the particle are printed out in this tally.
For nucleus, you can use the expression like 208Pb and Pb. The later case, Pb, denotes all isotopes ofPb.
6.7.2 axis definition
X axis value for output is described here. There are many kind of axis shown as (depends on tallykinds and mesh shape)eng, reg, x, y, z, r, t, xy, yz, zx, rz,cos, the, mass, charge, chart, dchain,let, t-eng, eng-t, t-e1, e1-t, t-e2, e2-t, e12, e21axis = eng

You can set multiple axis per one tally byaxis = eng x yor,axis = eng
axis = xaxis = y

If you define multiple axes, output results are written in different files. So you need to specify
multiple output files as shown in the next subsection when multiple axes are defined.
6.7.3 file definition
The format to define name of output file is,file = file.001 file.002 file.003

As described before, when you set multiple axis, set output files for each axis like following
130example.

file = file.001
file = file.002
file = file.003

6.7.4 unit definition
Set output unit asunit = number

The unit number and its meanings are described in each tally explanation.
6.7.5 factor definition
You can set normalize factor by this format.

factor = numberThis value is multiplied to output values. When you use the [t-gshow] tally, this factor defines line
thickness instead.
6.7.6 output definition
Set output type as

output = name of output

Details are described in each tally explanation.
6.7.7 info definition
This option define whether detailed information is outputted or not. Set 0 or 1 asinfo = 0, 1

6.7.8 title definition
This option is for title as131

title = title of the tally

It is omissible, and in this case, default is used.
6.7.9 ANGEL parameter definition
In order to add ANGEL parameters in tally output, define asangel = xmin(1.0) ymin(1.3e-8)

Defined parameter is converted to the ANGEL format asp: xmin(1.0) ymin(1.3e-8)
See ANGEL manual for details.
6.7.10 2d-type definition
When you define 2 dimensional output as axis = xy, you must set this 2d-type option as

2d-type = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

These 2d-types give the format of data arrange.
・2d-type = 1, 2, 3, 6, 7
Data are written by below format (the example is written by fortran style).
( ( data(ix,iy), ix = 1, nx ), iy = ny, 1, -1 )10 data are written in a line. Also a header for ANGEL input is inserted. ANGEL header isinserted by 2d-type= 1 for contour plot, 2d-type = 2 for cluster plot, 2d-type = 3 for color plot
2d-type = 6 for cluster and contour plot, 2d-type = 7 for color and contour plot.
・2d-type = 4
Data are written by below format
do iy = ny, 1, -1
do ix = 1, nx( x(ix), y(iy), data(ix,iy) )end doend do3 data of x(ix), y(iy) and data(ix,iy) is written in a line.
・2d-type = 5
Data are written by below format
132

y/x ( x(ix), ix = 1, nx )do iy = ny, 1, -1( y(iy), data(ix,iy), ix = 1, nx )end donx + 1 data is written in a line, and total ny + 1 lines. It is useful to use in the tabular soft like Excel.
6.7.11 gshow definition
This option can be used in all tallies without [T-Gshow] and [T-Rshow]. If you set gshow option
with xyz mesh, xy, yz, or xz axis, and 2d-type = 1,2, or 3, ANGEL can create a graphical plot with region
boundary and material name, or region name, or lattice number on the two dimensional output. You canalso obtain graphical plots directory from the PHITS calculation by the ―epsout‖ option.

gshow =

0, 1, 2, 3, 4

In above example, 0 means no gshow option, 1 means gshow with region boundary, 2 means gshow
with region boundary and material name, 3 means gshow with region boundary and region name, 3 meansgshow with region boundary and lattice numbers. When you increase the resolution of the plot by ―resol‖parameter, the indication of region name, material name and lattice number on the graph are sometimes
disturbed. In this case, you should increase the mesh points instead of ―resol‖.
You can see your geometry plot on a graph without transport calculation by setting ―icntl = 8‖ in the[Parameter] section, and this gshow option. You should check whether regions are correct, and a xyz
mesh resolution is good or not, before long time calculation.

133

6.7.12 rshow definition
You can use rshow definition in all tallies except for [T-Gshow] tally. This option is available with
region mesh, xy, yz, zx axis. This option makes a two dimensional plot in which each region is coloredwith the amount of its regions’ output value. And region boundaries, material name, or region name, or
lattice numbers are also displayed.
The xyz mesh definition is required after this rshow definition. Of course this definition is essential
to [T-Rshow] tally.

rshow = 1, 2, 3, 4
x-type = [2,4]..........
..........
y-type = [2,4]..........
..........
z-type = [2,4]..........
..........

―rshow = 0‖ means no rshow option, 1 means rshow with region boundary, 2 means gshow with
region boundary and material name, 3 means gshow with region boundary and region name, 3 meansgshow with region boundary and lattice numbers. If ―rshow =0‖, xyz mesh definition is not required,comment out it. When you increase the resolution of the plot by ―resol‖ parameter, the indication ofregion name, material name and lattice number on the graph are sometimes disturbed. In this case, you
should increase the mesh points instead of ―resol‖.
If you use the rshow option with ―reg‖ mesh, there is no output for the values of each region. In thiscase, you can not re-plot the figure because of no original data. When this rshow option is used, usuallyaxis is set as xy, yz, and zx. But you should use in addition, ―axis = reg‖ in order to save results intoanother file, for re-plotting. You can re-plot figures from saved data and [t-rshow] tally function.
You can execute this option without transport calculation by using ―icntl =10‖ in the [Parameter]
section. For ―icntl =10‖, PHITS make a two dimensional plot for the tallies with ―reg‖ mesh, xy, yz, zx
axis and ―rshow = 1, 2, 3, 4‖. In the figure, different colors are used for different materials. You should
check whether regions are correct and a xyz mesh resolution is good or not, before long time calculation.
6.7.13 x-txt, y-txt, z-txt definition
If you want to change x, y, and z axis titles in the output figure, use these option. These title can not
be defined in the ANGEL parameters.

x-txt = x axis title
y-txt = y axis title
z-txt = z axis title

1346.7.14 volmat definition
The volmat parameter corrects a volume where xyz mesh crosses region boundaries. This option iseffective in the case that mesh is xyz, and the material parameter is defined. This corrected volume iscalculated by the Monte Carlo method for specified material. ―volmat‖ denotes the number of scanningparallel to x, y, and z axis respectively for the Monte Carlo calculation. So If you set too large ―volmat‖,calculation takes long time. You need to take care of it. If ―volmat‖ is given by negative value, all xyz
mesh is scanned. If positive value, the scanning is not performed when 8 apexes of the mesh are includedin the same material.
6.7.15 epsout definition
If you set ―epsout =1‖, output file is treated by ANGEL automatically and an eps file is created. Thiseps file name is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖. With ―itall = 1‖ setting, the eps file iscreated after every batch calculation. You can monitor the PHITS results in real time, by displaying theeps file with the ghostview and by setting refresh function for a file updating by typing ―w‖ key on theghostview.
6.7.16 counter definition
You can make a gate to the tallying quantities by using the counter defined by [counter] section. Set
minimum ―ctmin(i)‖ and maximum value ―ctmax(i)‖ for each counter. The ―i‖ is the counter number from
1 to 3. By default, ―ctmin(i) = -9999‖, and ―ctmax(i) = 9999‖. When multiple counters are specified, thecommon part of these terms are tallied.
6.7.17 resolution and line thickness definitions
You can increase the resolution of the region boundaries in the gshow, rshow, and 3dshow withkeeping xyz mesh by ―resol‖. Default value is 1, it is the same as xyz mesh resolution. If you set resol = 2,
the resolution becomes 2 times for each side. It is useful to draw smooth line for xyz mesh. Also you canobtain clear graphics by set ―resol‖ larger for the 3dshow. Even if you set ―resol‖ larger, memory usage is
not changed.
The width shows the line thickness for gshow, rshow, and 3dshow. Default value is 0.5.
6.7.18 trcl coordinate transformation
By this ―trcl‖ option, you can transform the coordinate of the r-z, and xyz mesh. There are two ways
to define the transformation as below.

trcl = number
trcl = O1 O2 O3 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

B8 B9 M

The first definition is to specify the transformation number defined in [Transform] section. The next
one is to define the transformation directly here with 13 parameters as same as in [Transform] section. If
the data is not written in a line, you can write them in multiple lines without the the line sequential mark.
But you need to put more than 12 blanks before data on the top of the sequential lines.
135

In the 3dshow tally, ―trcl‖ can be used to transform the box. This will be explained in the [T-3dshow]
tally section.
6.7.19 dump definition
In the [T-Cross], [T-Time], [T-Product] tallies, information of the particles can be dumped on the
file.
By the parameter of ―dump =‖, the number of the dump data in one record is specified. If thisnumber is given by positive number, the data is read as binary data. If negative, the data is read as ascii
data. In the next line, the data sequence of one record is described. The relation between the physicalquantities and id number is the followings,
Table 6-3: id number of dump data (1)physicalquantities
id
number

kf

x

y

z

u

v

w

e

wt

time

C1

C2

C3

sx

sy

sz

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Table 6-4: id number of dump data (2)physical quantities

name

nocas

nobch

no

id number

17

18

19

20

Here kf means the kf-code of the particles (see Table 4-4), x, y, z are coordinate (cm), u, v, w denotethe unit vector of the direction of the particle, e is the energy (MeV, or MeV/nucleon for nucleus), wt is
the weight, time is the initial time (ns), c1, c2, c3 are the values of counters, and sx, sy, sz are the unit
vector of the direction of spin, respectively name is a collsion number of the particle, nocas is a current
event number of this batch, nobch is a current batch number, no is a cascade id in this event. These areassumed as real*8 for the binary data, n(1p1e24.15) data format for the ascii data.
For an example, one record has 9 data as
kf e wt x y z u v w
To read this data, we write the parameters as
dump = 9
1 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7The dump data is written on the file define by ―file definition‖. When you use this dump parameter,
axis and file are restricted to one axis and one file, and unit is always 1. The normal output of the tally is
written on the file which name is ―filename‖ with .cfg. From this file, you can get information of the total
normalization factor.

136

7 Tally input format
7.1 [ T - T r a c k ] section[ T - T r a c k ] gives flux by the track length tally.
Table 7-1: [T-Track] parameters(1)
name

value

explanation

mesh =

reg, r-z, xyz

geometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

part =all (default)

maximum 6 particles in a [T-Track]particle namematerial =(omissible)

You can specify materials for scoring.

all,

all : default (same as no definition)

number of materials

When you set number of materials, define these material
numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included for scoring.

(next line)258

material numbers

e-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5energy mesh
You need energy mesh subsection below this option

t-type =unit =

1, 2, 3, 4, 5

time mesh(omissible)

You need time mesh subsection below this option

1, 2, 3, 4

1: [1/cm2/source]
2: [1/cm2/MeV/source]
3: [1/cm2/Lethargy/source]
4: [1/cm2/source] vol=1cm3, volmat=0

11, 12, 13, 14

11:[1/cm2/nsec/source]
12:[1/cm2/nsec/MeV/source]
13:[1/cm2/Lethargy/nsec/source]
14:[1/cm2/nsec/source] vol=1cm3, volmat=0

axis =

eng, reg, x, y, z, r,

x axis value of output dataxy, yz, xz, rz,

2 dimensionaltt time axis

file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

multiplier =number of material

multiplier for each material(omissible)

You need multiplier subsection below this option

factor =(omissible, D=1.0)

normalization factor

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parameters

2d-type =1,2,3,4,5,6,7

options for 2 dimensional plot(omissible)
137

Table 7-2: [T-Track] parameter (2)
name

value

explanation

x-txt =
z-txt =

(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)

x axis title
y axis title
z axis title

gshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), region name (3), and
LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
rshow = When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), region name (3), and
LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.

resol =

1 (default)

width =

0.5 (default)

volume(omissible)

y-txt =

reg vol
volmat =72 (default)(omissible, D=9)

epsout =0 (default), 1

ctmin(i) =trcl =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

gslat =

1(default), 0

iechrl =ctmax(i) =The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times
with gshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow
option.
The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh.
You need volume definitions below this option.
Default values are given in input echo in the case of no
definition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo
The option corrects a volume value for each mesh whenmaterial is defined by xyz mesh. (0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scans for one side ofxyz meshIf epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. Thiseps file name is named by replacing the extension into―.eps‖.
minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter
coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or
xyz mesh
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no138

Format for the definition of multiplier is shown below.

multiplier = number of materialpart = proton
emax = 150
mat
mset1
mset2
1 ( 0.1236 1 1 -4 ) ( 0.0 )2 ( 0.0060 2 1 -4 ) ( 0.0 )3 ( 0.0032 3 1 -4 ) ( 0.0 ).... ....
.... ....
.... ....
.... ....
multiplier = number of materialpart = neutron
emax = 150
mat
mset1
mset2
1 ( 0.1236 1 1 -4 : -6 -8 ) ( 1.0 -1 33 0.543 )2 ( 0.0060 2 1 -4 : -6 -8 ) ( 1.0 -1 34 0.321 )3 ( 0.0032 3 1 -4 : -6 -8 ) ( 1.0 -1 35 0.678 ).... ....
.... ....
.... ....
.... ....

The line of ―multiplier = ‖ specifies the number of material where multiplier is considered. You canall ―all‖ instead of number. For this case, one should also use all for ―mat‖ column below. The second lineof ―part = ‖ define the particles considered. The maximum number of the particle is 6 and ―all‖ can bealso used, which is default. The multiplier affects only on these particle, if the data has the information forthem. If not, there is no effect. At the present, the data of neutron and photon is available by using ENDF
or JENDLE data file, and proton by LA150. The third line of ―emax = ‖ defines the maximum energy ofmultiplier. If emax is omitted, or if emax <dmax, it is automatically defined as ―emax = dmax(i), i = 1, 2,
or 14‖. The number of ―mat‖ column is the material number which is considered to be multiplied.
The columns of mset1, ―mset2, ......., mset6‖ define the multiplier set. The maximum 6 maltiplier canbe set. For each set, the result is printed out. For the case of above example, where there are several
multiplier definitions, the number of multiplier sets should be equal. In above example, the ―mset1‖ isfor heat and the ―mset2‖ is zero for proton, attenuator set for neutron.
As a special set, you can use ( C k ), k<0. This is 1/weight with ―k = -1‖, 1/velocity with ―k = -2‖.
With ―k = -102‖, this set is for dose conversion factor of neutron, with ―k = -114‖ for dose conversion
factor of photon, respectively, which data are included in the code.7-1). The unit of dose conversion factor
is (S v/h)/(n/sec/cm2).
It should be noted that the interpolation method of conversion factor has been changed in PHITS
ver.2.00 from linear-linear to log-log.

1397.2 [ T - C r o s s ] section[ T - C r o s s ] gives resulting flux and current by the surface crossing tally.
You can obtain a current for specified angles using the angel meshs.
Table 7-3: [T-Cross] parameter (1)
name

value

explanation

mesh =

reg, r-z, xyz

geometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

part =all (default),

maximum 6 particles in a [t-cross]particle namee-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5energy mesh
You need energy mesh subsection below this option

a-type =1, 2, -1, -2

angle mesh (1, 2 :cos, -1, -2 :degree)

The option is required

You need angle mesh subsection below this option

for a-curr and oa-currt-type =unit =

1, 2, 3, 4, 5

time mesh(omissible)

You need time mesh subsection below this option

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

1: [1/cm2/source]
2: [1/cm2/MeV/source]
3: [1/cm2/Lethargy/source]
4: [1/cm2/source] vol=1cm3, volmat=0
5: [1/cm2/MeV/source/SR]
6: [1/cm2/Lethargy/source/SR]

11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16

11:[1/cm2/nsec/source]
12:[1/cm2/nsec/MeV/source]
13:[1/cm2/Lethargy/nsec/source]
14:[1/cm2/nsec/source] vol=1cm3, volmat=0
15: [1/cm2/MeV/nsec/source/SR]
16: [1/cm2/Lethargy/nsec/source/SR]

140

Table 7-4: [T-Cross] parameter (2)
name

value

explanation

axis =

eng, reg, x, y, z, r,

x axis value of output datacos, the, tangle (cos, the) and time (t) meshxy

2 dimensional

file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

factor =(omissible, D=1.0)

normalization factor

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parameters

2d-type =1,2,3,4,5,6,7 (omissible)

options for 2 dimensional plot

output =flux

flux by surface crossing

current

current current by surface crossing

f-currorward current by surface crossing

b-currbackward current by surface crossing

o-curromni current by surface crossing, omni means the energy
integrated

of-curr

omni forward current by surface crossing

ob-curr

omni backward current by surface crossing

a-currangle mesh current by surface crossing

oa-curr

angle mesh omni current by surface crossing

x-txt =

(omissible)

x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z axis title

gshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.

resol =

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times withgshow or rshow option.

width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow option.

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps filename is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

ctmin(i) =(omissible, D=-9999)

minimum value for i-th counterctmax(i) =(omissible, D= 9999)

maximum value for i-th countertrcl =(omissible)

coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
mesh

dump =

number of data

For mesh=reg, the information is dumped on the file.

(omissible)

If dump is negative, data is written by ascii, if positive, bybinary.

((nextdata sequence

define the data sequence.

1(default), 0

1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noline)
gslat =

141

In the [T-Cross] tally, you can use the dump option only with ―reg‖ mesh, and only with ―reg‖ axis.
If the dump option is set, the meshes of ―e-type, a-type and t-type‖ have only the meaning of the
maximum and minimum values. The output option is set to be current, ―a-curr‖ or ―oa-curr‖. The file inwhich the dump data is written is the file defined by ―file = ‖. When you use this dump parameter, axis
and file are restricted to one axis and one file. The normal output of the tally is written on the file whichname is ―filename‖ with .cfg. From this file, you can get information of the total normalization factor. To
do so, you had better set one mesh for ―e-type, a-type and t-type‖.
If you set ―mesh = reg‖ for geometry mesh in this section, you must define crossing surface byregion number for in- and out- regions as an example below.

mesh = reg
reg = number of crossing surfaces
r-in
r-out
area
2
8
10.0
3
8
5.0
(45) (45)2.0(13<5) (14<5)
7.0(13<6) (14<6)
7.0(13<7) (14<7)
7.0
...
...
....
...
...
....

The default order for this definition is ―r-in r-out area‖. If you want to change the order, define as―r-in r-out area‖. You can use the skip operator ―non‖. You can use the format ( | 2 - 5 | 8 9 ), and you can
use the lattice and universe styles as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by ( ) if it is nota single numeric value. If you set ―output = flux‖, obtained flux is one way from ―r-in to r-out‖. If you
want to set both ways flux, set as the third line of above definition.
If you set ―mesh = r-z‖, two kinds of crossing surface are defined, one is the number of ―nz+1‖
crossing surfaces for z defined by ri - ri+1, and the latter is the number of ―nr+1‖ crossing surfaces for r
defined by zi- zi+1. If r-surface coincides with the surface of outer void, the flux on this surface is nottallied.
If you set ―mesh=xyz‖, the number of ―nz+1‖ crossing surfaces for z are defined by xi - xi+1 and yj-yj+1. In this case, x and y crossing surfaces are not defined. When you set ―mesh = rz, xyz‖, crossing
particles are detected in both ways at defined surface. The forward definitions are, positive direction in z
surface, and from center to outside in r surface.

1427.3 [ T - Y i e l d ] section[ T - Y i e l d ] gives information on produced nuclei. Products by neutrons in the energy below―dmax(2)‖ are not usually scored, but scored with ―e-mode=1‖.
Table 7-5: [T-Yield] parameter (1)
name

value

explanation

mesh =

reg, r-z, xyz

geometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

special =D=0 (omissible)

When special > 0, nuclear reactions are repeated more thanonce in order to increase statistics.

material =(omissible)

You can specify materials for scoring.

all,

all, all : default (same as no definition)

number of materials

When you set number of materials, define these material
numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included for scoring.

(next line)258

material numbers

mother =(omissible)

You can specify mother nuclei.

all,all, all : default (same with no definition)

numberofmothernuclei

When you set number of mother nuclei, define there mothersin the next line.
You can set number of mothers by negative.
In this case, specified mothers are not included for scoring.

(next line)

208Pb Pb

Nucleus if you specify with mass. Without mass, all isotopesof Pb
If you want to specify multiple mother groups, use multiple[T-Yield] tallies

nucleus =(omissible)

You can specify output nuclei.

all,all, all : default (same with no definition)

number of nuclei

number of nuclei When you set number of nuclei, define there
nuclei in the next line.

(next line)

208Pb Pb

Nucleus If you specify with mass. Without mass, all isotopesof Pbunit =

1, 2

1: [1/source]
2: [1/cm3/source]ndata =

0(default), 1

If you set 1, nuclei production cross section data is used fornucleus irradiation and , 14N, 16O targets cases as shown
below.

The following nuclear reactions are included in the available nuclear data for ―ndata=1‖.

143

4

He(n,x)3H

14

N(n,x)3H

14

N(n,x)7Be

14

14

N(n,x)13N

16

O(n,x)3H

16

16

16

O(n,x)14C

16

16

4

N(n,x)14C
O(n,x)11C
O(n,x)15º14N(n,x)11Be

14

N(n,x)10C

14

N(n,x)11C

O(n,x)7Be

16

O(n,x)11Be

16

O(n,x)15C

16

O(n,x)13N

16

O(n,x)16N

16

O(n,x)10C

O(n,x)14O

He(p,x)3H

14

N(p,x)7Be

14

N(p,x)11Be

14

N(p,x)10C

14

14

14

N(p,x)14º

16

16O(p,x)7Be

16

O(p,x)11Be

16

16

16

O(p,x)14C

16

N(p,x)13N
O(p,x)11C

O(p,x)3H
O(p,x)13N

16

O(p,x)14O

N(p,x)11C

O(p,x)10C

16

O(p,x)15O

Table 7-6: [T-Yield] parameter(2)
name

value

explanation

axis =

reg, x, y, z, r,

x axis for output

xy, yz, xz, rz,

2 dimension

mass

Mass distribution. If the case nucleus is specified, isotope
distribution.

chargeCharge distribution. Nucleus can not be specified.

chart

Nucleus chart (x:N, y:Z). Nucleus can not be specified

dchainfor dchain-sp output. All isotopes are outputted only mesh =regfile =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

output =(omissible)change the timing of the score.

product (default)

Nuclei produced by nuclear reaction are tallied.

cutoffNuclei stopped by energy cutoff are tallied.
If nuclei are not transported, this is the same as productinfo =

0, 1

Error informations are written in another file for dchain
With stable nuclei and magic number for chart.

factor =(omissible, D=1.0)

normalization factor

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parameters

2d-type =1,2,3,4,5,6,7

options for 2 dimensional plot(omissible)
x-txt =

(omissible)

x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z axis title

If you specify ―output=cutoff‖, the parameters of ―part‖, and ―mother‖ are neglected.

144

Table 7-7: [T-Yield] parameter (3)
name

value

explanation

gshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.

resol =

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times withgshow or rshow option.

width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow
option.

volume(omissible)

The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh. You
need volume definitions below this option.
Default values are given in input echo in the case of noreg voldefinition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2

iechrl =72 (default)

Number of maximum column for volume input echo

volmat =(omissible, D=9)

The option corrects a volume value for each mesh whenmaterial is defined by xyz mesh. (0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scans for one side ofxyz mesh

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps
file name is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

ctmin(i) =(omissible, D=-9999)

minimum value for i-th counterctmax(i) =(omissible, D= 9999)

maximum value for i-th countertrcl =(omissible)

coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
mesh

gslat =

1(default), 0

1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no145

7.4 [ T - H e a t ] section[ T - H e a t ] gives deposit energy for optional region. Deposit energy by low energy neutron, photon,and electron can be also tallied in this tally. The heat from neutrons is usually obtained from Kerma factor
with nuclear data. For e-mode=1, the heat from neutrons is zero, the heat is calculated from energy loss of
all charged particles and nucleus. The heat from photons is also usually obtained from Kerma factor with
nuclear data. For electron=1 with electron transport, we do not use the Kerma facor of photon, but obtain
the heat from the energy loss of electrons. If you want to get the deposit energy distribution by―output=deposit-***‖, we recommend e-mode=1. Otherwise, you cannot get the distribution of deposit
energy by neutrons.
Table 7-8: [T-Heat] parameter (1)
name

value

explanation

mesh =

reg, r-z, xyz

geometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

axis =

eng, reg, x, y, z, r,

x axis value of output dataxy, yz, xz, rz,

2 dimensional

file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

material =(omissible)

You can specify materials for scoring.

all,

all : default (same as no definition)

number of materials

When you set number of materials, define these material
numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included for scoring.

(next line)258

material numbers

e-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5energy mesh for output = deposit-***You need energy mesh subsection below this option

output =Heat

heat without ncut, gcut and pcut

simpleheat by recoil, ionization, low energy neutron, electron andothers as components of heat, ncut, gcut, pcut, leakage and

all

heat
in addition to above, recoil of d, t, 3He, , residual ionizationof p, +; , others stopped particles for p, neutron, photon, +; -, others
others remaining excitation energy and fusion component
When 2 dimensional, ―heat‖ is only ―total‖, and ―all‖ is sameas ―simple‖.
Only total, recoil, ionization, low neutron, electron, and others

deposit-heat

are outputteddeposit-simple

When you use deposit-heat, simple, all,deposit-all

You need e-type subsection for this option
Only ―eng‖ is used for axis. Unit 3: [1/source] is only
available.
146

Neutrons, photons, and protons below cut off energy, are not tallied in the ―ncut, gcut, and pcut‖component, but in the stopped particle if ―incut=0‖, ―igcut=0‖, and ―ipcut=0‖ in the parameter section.
When ―incut>0‖,‖ igcut>0‖, and ―ipcut>0‖, they are tallied in the ―ncut‖, ―gcut‖, and ―pcut‖ parts.
Table 7-9: [T-Heat] parameter (2)
name

value

explanation

part =

particle name

You can specify particles. ionization and stopped particle are(omissible)used as output

1, 2, 3

1: [MeV/cm3/source]

unit =

2: [MeV/source]
3: [1/source], deposit energy distribution only
factor =(omissible, D=1.0)

normalization factor

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parameters

2d-type =1,2,3,4,5,6,7

options for 2 dimensional plot(omissible)
x-txt =

(omissible))x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z axis title

gshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=xyz, axis=xy, yz, xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=reg, axis=xy, yz, xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.

resol =

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times withgshow or rshow option.

width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow
option.

By ―deposit-***‖ for the parameter of output, the deposit energy distribution per source can beobtained. When you use this option, you should not use the importance, weight window, nor forced
collision which changes the weight of the particles. Otherwise, the result is disturbed.
In the case of ―deposit = 0‖, each component of the deposit energy denotes a ratio to the total deposit
energy. On the other hand, for ―deposit = 1‖ case, each component shows the deposit energy distributionof the component. In this case, the sum of each component is not equal to the total deposit energy.
Generally speaking, heat is an energy of ionization of charged particles. However, in the transport
simulation, cutoff energy of the particle is set and the transport is stopped below the energy. Then there
exist some component of heat, i.e. recoil, stopped particle, and others, in the output of the heat tally. These
components may change as the parameters of the transport are changed. Particularly, the deposit energy147distribution depends so much on the parameters. You should check whether the recoil and the others are
zero or not in your output. To make them zero, you need to set the cutoff energies of charged particle andnucleus to be very small, include the photon transport, and include the gamma decay of the residual
nuclei.
Table 7-10: [T-Heat] parameter (3)
name

value

explanation

volume(omissible)

The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh. You
need volume definitions below this option.
Default values are given in input echo in the case of noreg voldefinition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2

iechrl =72 (default)

Number of maximum column for volume input echo

volmat =(omissible, D=9)

The option corrects a volume value for each mesh whenmaterial is defined by xyz mesh. (0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scans for one side ofxyz mesh

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps
file name is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

electron =0 (default), 1

electron contribution options
0: using photon KERMA factor (electron and positron should
NOT be transported, otherwise their deposition energies aredouble counted)
1: calculating by ionization loss (electron and positrontransports are required)deposit =0 (default), 1

display options for deposit energy
0: deposit energy distribution for total heat
1: deposit energy distribution for each components

ctmin(i) =(omissible, D=-9999)

minimum value for i-th counterctmax(i) =(omissible, D= 9999)

maximum value for i-th countertrcl =(omissible)

coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
mesh

gslat =

1(default), 0

1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no148

7.5 [ T - S t a r ] section[ T - S t a r ] gives star density which is the distribution of the nuclear reactions. Reactions forelectron by libraries are not included.
Table 7-11: [T-Star] parameter (1)
name

value

explanation

mesh =

reg, r-z, xyz

geometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

part =
material =all (default),

maximum 6 particles in a [t-star]particle nameprojectile particle of the reaction(omissible)

You can specify materials for scoring.

all,

all : default (same as no definition)

number of materials

When you set number of materials, define these material
numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.

(next line)
mother =In the case, specified materials are not included for scoring.
258

material numbers(omissible)

You can specify mother nuclei.

all,

all : default (same with no definition)

numberofmothernuclei

When you set number of mother nuclei, define there mothersin the next line.
You can set number of mothers by negative.
In this case, specified mothers are not included for scoring.

(next line)

208Pb Pb

Nucleus if you specify with mass. Without mass, all isotopesof Pb
If you want to specify multiple mother groups, use multiple[t-star] tallies

nucleus =(omissible)

You can specify output nuclei.

all,all, all : default (same with no definition)

number of nuclei

number of nuclei When you set number of nuclei, define there
nuclei in the next line.

(next line)

208Pb Pb

Nucleus If you specify with mass. Without mass, all isotopesof Pb

e-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5energy mesh
You need energy mesh subsection below this option

unit =

1, 2

1: [1/cm3/source]
2: [1/cm3/MeV/source]

axis =
file =

eng, reg, x, y, z, r,

x axis value of output dataxy, yz, xz, rzt

2 dimensional

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

149

Table 7-12: [T-Star] parameter (2)
name

value

explanation

output =allstar density for all reactions

decay

star density for decay reaction

elastic

star density for elastic reaction

nuclearstar density for non-elastic + Hydrogen + HI

fissionstar density for fission

absorption

star density for absorption

heavyionstar density for Heavy Ion reaction

factor =(omissible, D=1.0)

normalization factor

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parameters

2d-type =1,2,3,4,5,6,7

options for 2 dimensional plot(omissible)
x-txt =

(omissible)

x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z axis title

gshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option. You need xyz mesh section below this option.

resol =

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times withgshow or rshow option.

width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow
option.

volume(omissible)

The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh. You
need volume definitions below this option.
Default values are given in input echo in the case of noreg voldefinition. volume definition. See 5.1.2

iechrl =72 (default)

Number of maximum column for volume input echo

volmat =(omissible, D=9)

The option corrects a volume value for each mesh whenmaterial is defined by xyz mesh. (0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scans for one side ofxyz mesh

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps
file name is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

ctmin(i) =(omissible, D=-9999)

minimum value for i-th counterctmax(i) =(omissible, D= 9999)

maximum value for i-th countertrcl =(omissible)

coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
150

name

value

explanation
mesh

Gslat =

1(default), 0

1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no7.6 [ T - T i m e ] section[ T - T i m e ] gives number of energy cut off and escape particles by the time mesh (nsec).
Table 7-13: [T-Time] parameter (1)
name

value

explanation

mesh =

reg, r-z, xyz

geometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

part =all (default),

maximum 6 particles in a [t-track]particle namematerial =(omissible)

You can specify materials for scoring.

all,

all : default (same as no definition)

number of materials

When you set number of materials, define these material
numbers in the next line. You can set number of materials by
negative. In the case, specified materials are not included forscoring.

(next line)258

material numbers

t-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5

time mesh
You need time mesh subsection below this option

e-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5energy mesh
You need energy mesh subsection below this option

unit =

1, 2, 3, 4

1: [1/source]
2: [1/nsec/source]
3:[1/nsec/cm3/source]
4:[1/nsec/cm3/MeV/source]

axis =

eng, reg, x, y, z, r,

x axis value of output dataxy, yz, xz, rz

2 dimensional

file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

output =allenergy cut off and escape particles

cutoffenergy cut off particles

escapeescape particles

factor =(omissible, D=1.0)

normalization factor

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parameters

2d-type =1,2,3,4,5,6,7

options for 2 dimensional plot(omissible)151

Table 7-14: [T-Time] parameter (2)
name

value

explanation

x-txt =

(omissible)

x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z axis title

gshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option. You need xyz mesh section below this option.

resol =

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times withgshow or rshow option.

width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow
option.

volume(omissible)

The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh. You
need volume definitions below this option.
Default values are given in input echo in the case of noreg voldefinition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2

iechrl =72 (default)

Number of maximum column for volume input echo

volmat =(omissible, D=9)

The option corrects a volume value for each mesh whenmaterial is defined by xyz mesh. (0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scans for one side ofxyz mesh

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps
file name is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

ctmin(i) =(omissible, D=-9999)

minimum value for i-th counterctmax(i) =(omissible, D= 9999)

maximum value for i-th countertrcl =(omissible)

coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
mesh

dump =

number of data

For mesh=reg, the information is dumped on the file.

(omissible)

If dump is negative, data is written by ascii, if positive, by(next line)
gslat =

binary.
data sequence

define the data sequence.

1(default), 0

1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noYou can obtain energy spectra of the energy cut off and escape particles by the [t-time] tally.
Especially, [T-Time] is the only tally to give energy spectra of the particles which can not be transported
in PHITS, since they are assumed as cut off particles in the code.
152

In the [T-Time] tally, you can use the dump option only with ―output = cutoff‖. If the dump option isset, the meshes of ―e-type‖ and ―t-type‖ have only the meaning of the maximum and minimum values,
and unit is set to be 1. The file in which the dump data is written is defined by ―file = ‖. When you use thisdump parameter, axis and file are restricted to one axis and one file. The normal output of the tally is
written on the file which name is ―filename‖ with .cfg. From this file, you can get information of the total
normalization factor. To do so, you had better set one mesh for ―e-type‖ and ―t-type‖.
By this dump option, you can create similar files to ―ncut, gcut and pcut‖ files for the sequential
calculations of the other transport code.

1537.7 [ T - D P A ] section[ T - D P A ] gives DPA (Displacement per Atom) value. DPA by low energy neutron can bealso obtained by using libraries In this case, you must specify the library. If you use ―e-mode=1‖, you
can get the DPA values without the DPA library.
Table 7-15: [T-DPA] parameter (1)
name

value

explanation

mesh =

reg, r-z, xyz

geometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

part =all (default),

maximum 6 particles in a [t-track]particle namematerial =(omissible)

You can specify materials for scoring.

all,

all, all : default (same as no definition)

number of materials

When you set number of materials, define these material
numbers in the next line. You can set number of materials by
negative. In the case, specified materials are not included forscoring.

(next line)258

material numbers

mother =(omissible)

You can specify mother nuclei.

all,all, all : default (same with no definition)

number of mother nuclei

When you set number of mother nuclei, define there mothersin the next line. You can set number of mothers by negative.
In this case, specified mothers are not included for scoring.

(next line)

208Pb Pb

Nucleus if you specify with mass. Without mass, all isotopesof Pbunit =(mother is not effective in

If you want to specify multiple mother groups, use multiple

library use)

[t-dpa] tallies

1, 2

1: [DPA/source*1.e+24]
2: [DPA/source]

axis =

reg, x, y, z, r,

x axis value of output dataxy, yz, xz, rz

2 dimensional

file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

output =dpa

DPA output

simpletotal, elastic, non-elastic, transport charged particles, DPA
output from neutron libraryall

add d, t, 3He, , and nucleus contributions as PKA, with―simple‖154

Table 7-16: [T-DPA] parameter (2)
name

value

explanation

factor =(omissible, D=1.0)

normalization factor

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parameters

2d-type =1,2,3,4,5,6,7

options for 2 dimensional plot(omissible)
x-txt =

(omissible)

x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z axis title

gshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.

resol =

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times withgshow or rshow option.

width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow
option.

volume(omissible)

The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh. You
need volume definitions below this option. Default values are
given in input echo in the case of no definition.

reg vol

volume definition. See 5.1.2

iechrl =72 (default)

Number of maximum column for volume input echo

volmat =(omissible, D=9)

The option corrects a volume value for each mesh whenmaterial is defined by xyz mesh. (0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scans for one side ofxyz mesh

epsout =0 (default), 1

f epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps
file name is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

library =number of materials

Define DPA library for each material.

(omissible)

Format is shown later.

ctmin(i) =(omissible, D=-9999)

minimum value for i-th counterctmax(i) =(omissible, D= 9999)

maximum value for i-th countertrcl =(omissible)

coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
mesh

gslat =

1(default), 0

1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no155

Format of library specification
library = number of materialpart = proton
emax = 3000
mat
fac
lib
mt
1
1.0
41
445
2
1.0
42
445
3
1.0
43
445
.... ....
.... ....
.... ....
.... ....
library = number of materialpart = neutron
emax = 3000
mat
fac
lib
mt
1
1.0
41
444
2
1.0
42
444
3
1.0
43
444
.... ....
.... ....
.... ....
.... ....

Define particles for library use by ―part =‖. Neutron and proton are available in this version. The―emax‖ defines the maximum energy of data from libraries. If you skip the part definition, neutron is set.
If you skip maximum energy set, the maximum energy of the library is defined. The ―mat‖ is the material
number for library used, the ―fac‖ is a normalization factor, the ―lib‖ is material number which contains
the library, and the ―mt‖ is DPA record number in the library. In the library made by Dr. Harada, mt=445
for proton, mt=444 for neutron. The ―fac‖ and ―mt‖ are omissible. If you skip the ―mt‖ definition, 444 isused. Material number defined by the lib should be defined in the [material] section. The ―y-type‖ data is
assumed for library data reading as shown below.
m41
m42
m43

4009.12y 1
13027.12y 1
26054.12y 3.3066d-04 26056.12y 5.2290d-02
26057.12y 1.2542d-03 26058.12y 1.5963d-04

You can change the order ―mat fac lib mt ― like ―mat lib mt fac‖. You can use the skip operation non.

156

7.8 [ T - P r o d u c t ] section[ T - P r o d u c t ] tallies particles and nucleus produced by nuclear reaction, decay, and fission, andalso tallies source particles. The differences from [T-Yield] are that [T-Product] does not include thecontribution from elastic collisions and you can get the energy distribution and time distribution of
produced particles and nuclei. This tally is not available for low energy neutron, photon, and electron. For―e-mode=1‖, however, particles and nucleus produced by reactions due to neutron with the library can beobtained.
Table 7-17: [T-Product] parameter (1)
name

value

explanation

mesh =

reg, r-z, xyz

geometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

part =all (default),

maximum 6 particles in a [t-track]particle namematerial =(omissible)

You can specify materials for scoring.

all,

all, all : default (same as no definition)

number of materials

When you set number of materials, define these material
numbers in the next line. You can set number of materials by
negative. In the case, specified materials are not included
for scoring.

(next line)258

material numbers

mother =(omissible)

You can specify mother nuclei.

all,all, all : default (same with no definition)

number of mother nuclei

When you set number of mother nuclei, define there mothersin the next line. You can set number of mothers by negative.
In this case, specified mothers are not included for scoring.

(next line)

208Pb Pb

Nucleus if you specify with mass. Without mass, all isotopesof Pb. If you want to specify multiple mother groups, use
multiple [t-yield] tallies

e-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5energy mesh
You need energy mesh subsection below this option

t-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5(omissible)

time mesh
You need time mesh subsection below this option

a-type =1, 2, -1, -2

angle mesh (1, 2 :cos, -1, -2 :degree)
You need angle mesh subsection below this option

157

Table 7-18: [T-Product] parameter (2)
name

value

explanation

unit =

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

1: [1/source]
2: [1/cm3/source]
3: [1/MeV/source]
4: [1/cm3/MeV/source]
5: [1/Lethargy/source]
6: [1/cm3/Lethargy/source]

11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16

11:[1/nsec/source]
12:[1/cm3/nsec/source]
13:[1/MeV/nsec/source]
14:[1/cm3/MeV/nsec/source]
15:[1/Lethargy/nsec/source]
16:[1/cm3/Lethargy/nsec/source]

21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26

21:[1/SR/source]
22:[1/cm3/SR/source]
23:[1/MeV/SR/source]
24:[1/cm3/MeV/SR/source]
25:[1/Lethargy/SR/source]
26:[1/cm3/Lethargy/SR/source]

31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36

31:[1/nsec/SR/source]
32:[1/cm3/nsec/SR/source]
33:[1/MeV/nsec/SR/source]
34:[1/cm3/MeV/nsec/SR/source]
35:[1/Lethargy/nsec/SR/source]
36:[1/cm3/Lethargy/nsec/SR/source]158

Table 7-19: [T-Product] parameter (3)
name

value

explanation

axis =

eng, reg, x, y, z, r,

x axis value of output dataxy, yz, xz, rz

2 dimensionalttime axis

file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

output =sourcesource source particle

nuclear (default)

particles from nuclear reaction including elastic

nonelaparticles from nonelastic collisionelastic

particles from elastic collision

decay

particles from decay

fissionparticles from fission

factor =(omissible, D=1.0)

normalization factor

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parameters

2d-type =1,2,3,4,5,6,7

options for 2 dimensional plot(omissible)
x-txt =

(omissible)

x-txt = (omissible) x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y-txt = (omissible) y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z-txt = (omissible) z axis title

gshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.

resol =

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times
with gshow or rshow option.

width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow
option.

volume(omissible)

The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh. You
need volume definitions below this option.
Default values are given in input echo in the case of noreg vol
iechrl =definition. reg vol volume definition. See 5.1.2
72 (default)

Number of maximum column for volume input echo

159

Table 7-20: [T-Product] parameter (4)
name

value

explanation

volmat =(omissible, D=9)

The option corrects a volume value for each mesh whenmaterial is defined by xyz mesh. (0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scans for one side ofxyz mesh

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps
file name is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

ctmin(i) =(omissible, D=-9999)

minimum value for i-th counterctmax(i) =(omissible, D= 9999)

maximum value for i-th countertrcl =(omissible)

coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
mesh

dump =

number of data

For mesh=reg, the information is dumped on the file.

(omissible)

If dump is negative, data is written by ascii, if positive, bybinary.

(next line)

data sequence

define the data sequence.

gslat =

1(default), 0

1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noIn the [T-Product] tally, you can use the dump option. If the dump option is set, the meshes of ―e-type‖and ―t-type‖ have only the meaning of the maximum and minimum values. The file in which the dump data is
written is defined by ―file = ‖. When you use this dump parameter, axis and file are restricted to one axis andone file, and unit is always 1. The normal output of the tally is written on the file which name is ―filename‖with .cfg. From this file, you can get information of the total normalization factor. To do so, you had better set
one mesh for ―e-type‖ and ―t-type‖.
This [T-Product] can tally the source particles. By using this function, you can modify the dump file. You
can read a dump file and write information on a new dump file with some modification by setting the dump
parameter and ―output = source‖ in this tally section, and ―icntl = 6‖ in the parameter section.

160

7.9 [ T - L E T ] section
By the LET tally, you can get information of track length and dose as a function of LET(dE/dx) of acertain material. This tally counts an energy loss of charged particles and nuclei, and thus, you must use
the Event Generator mode (e-mode = 1) if you would like to transport low-energy neutrons.
Table 7-21: [T-LET] parameters(1)
name

value

explanation

mesh =

reg, r-z, xyz

geometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

part =all (default),

maximum 6 particles in a [T-TRACK]

particle namematerial =(omissible)

You can specify materials for scoring.

all,

all, all : default (same as no definition)

number of materials

When you set number of materials, define these material
numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative. In the case,(next line)
letmat =specified materials are not included for scoring.
258

material numbers(omissible)

material id for LET(dE/dx). if omitted, real material is
assumed. If you select the material that is not used in yourgeometry, you have to define its material density in[Material] section.

l-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5

LET mesh
You need LET mesh subsection below this option

unit =

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

1: Track [cm/(keV/m)/source]
2: Dose [MeV/(keV/m)/source]
3: Track [cm/ln(keV/m)/source]
4: Dose [MeV/ln(keV/m)/source]
5: Track [cm/source]
6: Dose [MeV/source]

7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

7: Track [1/cm2/(keV/m)/source]
8: Dose [MeV/cm3/(keV/m)/source]
9: Track [1/cm2/ln(keV/m)/source]
10: Dose [MeV/cm3/ln(keV/m)/source]
11: Track [1/cm2/source]
12: Dose [MeV/cm3/source]

axis =

let, reg, x, y, z, r,

x axis value of output dataxy, yz, xz, rz

2 dimensional

file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

factor =(omissible, D=1.0)

normalization factor

161

Table 7-22: [T-LET] parameter (2)
name

value

explanation

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parameters

2d-type =1,2,3,4,5,6,7

options for 2 dimensional plot(omissible)
x-txt =

(omissible)

x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z axis title

gshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,

region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3) and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.
rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,

region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3) and LAT number(4) are plotted by
the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.
resol =

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times
with gshow or rshow option.

width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow
option.

volume(omissible)

The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh. You
need volume definitions below this option.
Default values are given in input echo in the case of no
definition.

reg volreg vol volume definition. See 5.1.2

iechrl =72 (default)

Number of maximum column for volume input echo

volmat =(omissible, D=9)

The option corrects a volume value for each mesh whenmaterial is defined by xyz mesh. (0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scans for one side ofxyz mesh

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps
file name is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

ctmin(i) =(omissible, D=-9999)

minimum value for i-th counterctmax(i) =(omissible, D= 9999)

maximum value for i-th countertrcl =(omissible)

coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
mesh

gslat =

1(default), 0

1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no162

7.10 [ T - S E D ] section
Calculation of the probability density of deposition energies in microscopic sites, called as lineal
energy y or specific energy z, is of great importance in estimation of relative biological effectiveness(RBE) of charged particles. However, such microscopic probability densities cannot be directly calculated
by PHITS simulation using [T-Deposit] or [T-Heat] tallies, since PHITS is designed to simulate particle
motions in macroscopic scale, and employs a continuous-slowing-down approximation (CSDA) for
calculating the energy loss of charged particles. We therefore introduced a special tally named [T-SED]
for calculating the microscopic probability densities using a mathematical function that can
instantaneously calculate quantities around trajectories of charged particles. The function was developedon the basis of track structure simulation, considering productions of -rays and Auger electrons. Notethat the name of ―SED‖ derives from ―Specific Energy Distribution‖. Details of the calculation procedureare given elsewhere.2-21, 2-22)
Using this tally, we can get information of probability densities of y and z in water. We can also
calculate the probability densities in different materials, although the accuracy has not been checked yet.
Similar to [T-LET], the dose is only counted in an energy loss of charged particles and nuclei, and thus,
we must use the event generator mode (e-mode = 1) if we would like to transport low-energy neutrons.
The deposition energy in microscopic sites can be expressed by deposit energy  in MeV, lineal energy y
in keV/m or specific energy z in Gy. The definitions of these quantities are given in ICRU Report 362-23).
Usage of [T-SED] is similar to that of [T-LET]..
Table 7-23: [T-SED] parameters(1)
name

value

explanation

mesh =

reg, r-z, xyz

geometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

part =all (default),

maximum 6 particles in a [t-sed]particle namematerial =(omissible)

You can specify materials for scoring.

all,

all, all : default (same as no definition)

number of materials

When you set number of materials, define these material
numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative. In the case,(next line)
letmat =specified materials are not included for scoring.
258

material numbers(omissible)

material id for LET(dE/dx). if omitted, real material is
assumed. If you use the material that is not used in yourgeometry, you have to define its material density in[Material] section.

163

Table 7-24: [T-SED] parameter (2)
name

value

explanation

se-unit =1,2,3

Unit of deposition energy in microscopic site
1: deposit energy  in MeV
2: lineal energy y in keV/m
3: specific energy z in Gy

cdiam =

(omissible, D=1.0)

Diameter of the microscopic site in m. You can select thevalue from 0.001 to 2.0

se-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5

 , y or z mesh (unit is defined by se-unit).
You need energy mesh subsection below this option(specified in ne, emin, emax etc.)

unit =

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

1: Track [cm/(keV/m)/source]
2: Dose [MeV/(keV/m)/source], corresponding to y*f(y)3: Track [cm/ln(keV/m)/source]
4: Dose [MeV/ln(keV/m)/source] , corresponding to y*d(y)5: Track [cm/source]
6: Dose [MeV/source]
The units are for the case of se-unit = 2. For se-unit = 1 and3, (keV/m) is replaced by (MeV) and (Gy), respectively.

axis =

sed, reg, x, y, z, r,

x axis value of output dataxy, yz, xz, rz

2 dimensional

file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

factor =(omissible, D=1.0)

normalization factor

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parameters

2d-type =1,2,3,4,5,6,7

options for 2 dimensional plot(omissible)
x-txt =

(omissible)

x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z axis title

gshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,

region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3) and LAT number(4) are plottedby the option.
rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,

region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3) and LAT number(4) are plottedby the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.
resol =

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times
with gshow or rshow option.

width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow
option.
164

Table 7-25: [T-SED] parameter (3)
name

value

explanation

volume(omissible)

The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh. You
need volume definitions below this option.
Default values are given in input echo in the case of no
definition.

reg volreg vol volume definition. See 5.1.2

iechrl =72 (default)

Number of maximum column for volume input echo

volmat =(omissible, D=9)

The option corrects a volume value for each mesh whenmaterial is defined by xyz mesh. (0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scans for one side ofxyz mesh

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps
file name is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

ctmin(i) =(omissible, D=-9999)

minimum value for i-th counterctmax(i) =(omissible, D= 9999)

maximum value for i-th countertrcl =(omissible)

coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
mesh

gslat =

1(default), 0

1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no165

7.11 [ T - Deposit ] section
This tally is very similar to [t-heat] and scores dose and deposit energy distributions. The diffrence
from [t-heat] is that this tally only counts an energy loss of charged particles and nuclei. Thus, you must
use the event generator mode (e-mode = 1) if you would like to transport low-energy neutrons. In thistally, you can multiply any factor as a function of LET(dE/dx) in a certain material to the dose or deposit
energy. This function is realized by user defined subroutine usrdfn1.f and usrdn2.f. In a sample programof usrdfn1.f and usrdfn2.f, PHITS returns the energy loss without any factor. You can change and add any
factor in this routine. In addition, by using the time mesh with the [Timer] section, you can simulate a
TOF (time of flight) detector and plot 2-dimensional graph of the correlation between the deposit energy
and the TOF.
Table 7-26: [T-Deposit] parameters(1)
name

value

explanation

mesh =

reg, r-z, xyz

geometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

part =all (default),

maximum 6 particles in a [t-track]particle namematerial =(omissible)

You can specify materials for scoring.

all,

all, all : default (same as no definition)

number of materials

When you set number of materials, define these material
numbers in the next line. You can set number of materials by
negative. In the case, specified materials are not included forscoring.

(next line)258

material numbers

letmat =(omissible)

material id for LET(dE/dx). if omitted, real material is
assumed.

dedxfnc =(omissible, D=0)

0: without, 1: use usrdfn1.f, 2: use usrdfn2.fe-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5energy mesh
You need energy mesh subsection below this option

t-type =output =1, 2, 3, 4, 5

time mesh(omissible)

You need time mesh subsection below this optiondose

dose score the energy loss of charged particles and nuclei

depositdeposit score deposit energy distribution
you need e-type subsection

unit =

1, 2, 3, 4

1: Dose [MeV/cm3/source]
2: Dose [MeV/source]
3: Number [1/source] ; only for output=deposit
4: Number [1/nsec/source] ; only for output=deposit

axis =

eng, reg, x, y, z, r, t

x axis value of output dataxy, yz, xz, rz,

2 dimensionalt-eng, eng-t
file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis
166

Table 7-27: [T-Deposit] parameter (2)
name

value

explanation

factor =(omissible, D=1.0)

normalization factor

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parameters

2d-type =1,2,3,4,5,6,7

options for 2 dimensional plot(omissible)
x-txt =((omissible))x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z axis title

gshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plottedby the option.

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plottedby the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.

resol =

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times
with gshow or rshow option.

width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow
option.

volume(omissible)

The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh. You
need volume definitions below this option.
Default values are given in input echo in the case of no
definition.

reg vol

volume definition. See 5.1.2

iechrl =72 (default)

Number of maximum column for volume input echo

volmat =(omissible, D=9)

The option corrects a volume value for each mesh whenmaterial is defined by xyz mesh. (0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scans for one side ofxyz mesh

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps
file name is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

ctmin(i) =(omissible, D=-9999)

minimum value for i-th counterctmax(i) =(omissible, D= 9999)

maximum value for i-th countertrcl =(omissible)

coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
mesh

gslat =

1(default), 0

1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noThis tally, one can only score the energy loss of charged particles. So you cannot get the sum of the167energy loss for a specific particle which goes into the tally region by useing part = in this tally section. In
order to tally the energy loss for each projectile particle going into the tally region, you should define thecounter with ―part =‖ in [Counter] section and ―ctmin, ctmax‖ in this tally section.
7.12[ T - Deposit2 ] section
This tally scores deposit energy distribution in two regions and plot the correlation between two
deposit energies. By this, you can simulate, for an example, dE, E counters and plot the correlations in
2-dimensional graph. In this tally, as in the [t-deposit] tally, you can multiply any factor as a function ofLET(dE/dx) in a certain material to the dose or deposit energy. This function is realized by user definedsubroutine usrdfn1.f and usrdn2.f. In a sample program of usrdfn1.f and usrdfn2.f, we return the energy
loss without any factor. You can change and add any factor in this routine. In addition, by using the timemesh with the [Timer] section, you can simulate a TOF detector and plot 2-dimensional graph of thecorrelation between the deposit energy and the TOF.
Table 7-28: [T-Deposit2] parameters(1)
name

value

explanation

mesh =

reggeometry mesh, only reg

reg =

2

it should be 2

r1 r2

r1 r2 two region number

all (default),

maximum 6 particles in a [t-track]

part =

particle nameletmat1 =(omissible)

material id for LET(dE/dx) of region r1, if omitted, realmaterial is assumed.

letmat2 =(omissible)

material id for LET(dE/dx) of region r2, if omitted, realmaterial is assumed.

dedxfnc1 =(omissible, D=0)

for region r1, 0: without, 1: use usrdfn1.f, 2: use usrdfn2.f

dedxfnc2 =(omissible, D=0)

for region r2, 0: without, 1: use usrdfn1.f, 2: use usrdfn2.f

e1-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5energy mesh for region r1
You need energy mesh subsection below this option

e2-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5energy mesh for region r2
You need energy mesh subsection below this option

t-type =unit =

1, 2, 3, 4, 5

time mesh(omissible)

You need time mesh subsection below this option

1, 2

1: Number [1/source]
2: Number [1/nsec/source]

axis =

eng1, eng2, t,

x axis value of output datae12, e21, t-e1, t-e2,

2 dimensional

e1-t, e2-t
file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

168

Table 7-29: [T-Deposit2] parameter (2)
name

value

explanation

factor =(omissible, D=1.0)

normalization factor

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parameters

2d-type =1,2,3,4,5,6,7

options for 2 dimensional plot(omissible)
x-txt =

(omissible)

x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z axis title

volume(omissible)

The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh. You
need volume definitions below this option. Default values are
given in input echo in the case of no definition.

reg vol

volume definition. See 5.1.2

iechrl =72 (default)

Number of maximum column for volume input echo

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps
file name is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

ctmin(i) =(omissible, D=-9999)

minimum value for i-th counterctmax(i) =((omissible, D= 9999)

maximum value for i-th counter

This tally, only scores the energy loss of charged particles. So you cannot get the sum of the energy
loss for a specific particle which goes into the tally region by useing ―part =‖ in this tally section. In orderto tally the energy loss for each projectile particle going into the tally region, you should define thecounter with ―part =‖ in [Counter] section and ―ctmin, ctmax‖ in this tally section.

169

7.13 [ T - G s h o w ] section[ T - G s h o w ] gives graphical geometry output for region boundary by xyz mesh. You can obtain
this results without transport calculations with ―icntl =7‖ option in the [parameter] section.
Table 7-30: [T-Gshow] parameter
name

value

explanation

mesh =

xyz

geometry mesh, only xyz mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

axis =

xy, yz, xz

2 dimensional

file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

output =1

region boundary2

region boundary + material color

3

region boundary + material name4region boundary + material color + material name5region boundary + region name6

region boundary + material color + region name7

region boundary + LAT number

8

region boundary + material color + LAT number

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times

resol =

with gshow or rshow option.
width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow
option.

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parametersx-txt =

(omissible)

x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps
file name is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

trcl =(omissible)

coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
mesh

gslat =

1(default), 0

1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no170

―output=7,8‖ can be used only when cells in bottom level are the lattice themselves, and they givelattice number in the format as (4,1,2). For example, the figure of the example in section 5.10 is generated
by the input shown below.
List 7.1 ● [T-Gshow] example
1: [ T - Gshow ]2:mesh = xyz
3:x-type = 24:nx = 1805:xmin = -45
6:xmax = 45
7:y-type = 28:ny = 1809:ymin = -45
10:ymax = 45
11:z-type = 2
12:
nz
= 1
13:
zmin = -10
14:zmax = 10
15:axis = xy
16:
output = 7
17:file = lex01.dat
18:
angel = xmin(-50) xmax(50) ymin(-50) ymax(50) nosp notl nofr noms
Z-plane shown in the figure is the plane of the intermediate position of z mesh (z = 0) defined in theexample.

171

7.14 [ T - R s h o w ] section[ T - R s h o w ] gives graphical geometry output for region boundary with color plot region in
proportion to physical quantity of the region. Usually, the results obtained by other PHITS calculation
using the ―reg‖ mesh are used as the input data for this value of physical quantity. You must run PHITS
with ―icntl =9‖ option in the [parameter] section, in order to execute this tally.
You can give color variation by the linear scale or the log scale by the ANGEL parameter, zlog orzlin. Default is zlin.
Table 7-31: [T-Rshow] parameter
name

value

explanation

mesh =

xyz

geometry mesh, only xyz mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option

axis =

xy, yz, xz

2 dimensional

file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

output =1

region boundary2

region boundary + material name3

region boundary + region name4region boundary + LAT number

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times withresol =

gshow or rshow option.
width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow option.

title =

(omissible)

title

angel =

(omissible)

angel parametersx-txt =

(omissible)

x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z axis title

reg =region definitionvalue
reg valdefinition with same format as volume definition see section 5.1.2

iechrl =72 (default)

Number of maximum column for volume input echo

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps filename is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

trcl =(omissible)

coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz meshgslat =

1(default), 0

1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no172

List 7.2 ● [T-Rshow] example
1: [ T - Rshow ]2:mesh = xyz
3:x-type = 24:nx = 1805:xmin = -45
6:xmax = 45
7:y-type = 28:ny = 1809:ymin = -45
10:ymax = 45
11:z-type = 2
12:
nz
= 1
13:
zmin = -10
14:zmax = 10
15:axis = xy
16:
output = 1
17:
file = lex05.dat
18:
angel = xmin(-50) xmax(50) ymin(-50) ymax(50) ¥19:
nosp notl nofr noms nocm zlin20:
reg = (3<2[ 0 -1 0]) (3<2[ 1 -1 0])
21:(3<2[-1 0 0]) (3<2[ 0 0 0]) (3<2[ 1 0 0])
22:(3<2[-1 1 0]) (3<2[ 0 1 0])
23:(4<2[ 0 -1 0]) (4<2[ 1 -1 0])
24:(4<2[-1 0 0]) (4<2[ 0 0 0]) (4<2[ 1 0 0])
25:(4<2[-1 1 0]) (4<2[ 0 1 0])
26:
value
27:
non regval
28:
1 10001 1.0000E+00 # ( 3 < 2[ 0 -1 0 ] )29:
2 10002 2.0000E+00 # ( 3 < 2[ 1 -1 0 ] )30:
3 10003 3.0000E+00 # ( 3 < 2[ -1 0 0 ] )31:
4 10004 4.0000E+00 # ( 3 < 2[ 0 0 0 ] )32:
5 10005 5.0000E+00 # ( 3 < 2[ 1 0 0 ] )33:
6 10006 6.0000E+00 # ( 3 < 2[ -1 1 0 ] )34:
7 10007 7.0000E+00 # ( 3 < 2[ 0 1 0 ] )35:
8 10008 3.0000E+00 # ( 4 < 2[ 0 -1 0 ] )36:
9 10009 4.0000E+00 # ( 4 < 2[ 1 -1 0 ] )37:
10 10010 5.0000E+00 # ( 4 < 2[ -1 0 0 ] )38:
11 10011 6.0000E+00 # ( 4 < 2[ 0 0 0 ] )39:
12 10012 7.0000E+00 # ( 4 < 2[ 1 0 0 ] )40:
13 10013 1.0000E+00 # ( 4 < 2[ -1 1 0 ] )41:
14 10014 2.0000E+00 # ( 4 < 2[ 0 1 0 ] )Fig. 7-1 Example of [T-Rshow].
173

7.15 [ T - 3 D s h o w ] section[ T - 3 D s h o w ] gives a graphical geometry output by a 3 dimensional view. You can execute thistally with ―icntl =11‖ option in the [parameter] section without transport calculations.
Table 7-32: [T-3Dshow] parameter (1)
name

value

explanation

output =

0

draft

1

only region boundary2

without region boundary

3 (default)

region boundary + color(omissible)

You can specify materials for display.

all,

all, all : default (same as no definition)material =numbermaterials

ofWhen you set number of materials, define these material numbers in
the next line. You can set number of materials by negative. In thecase, specified materials are not included for display.

(next line)258

material numbers

reg =(omissible)

You can specify regions for display.

all,

all, all : default (same as no definition)

region number

If the material is defined for this region, this region is displayed forthe material is negative defined, and vice versa.

x0 =(D=0.0)

Coordinates of original point for view point and light source. Centery0 =(D=0.0)of screen is defined by this point and view pointz0 =(D=0.0)e-the(D=80)

view point angle (degree) with z axis

e-phi =

(D=140)e-dst =

(D=w-dst*10)

azimuthal angle for view point  (degree) with x axis
distance between view point and the origin (cm)l-the =

(D=e-the)light source angle(degree) with z axis

l-phi =

(D=e-phi)

l-dst =

(D=e-dst)

azimuthal angle for light source (degree) with x axis
distance between light source and the origin (cm)w-wdt =

(D=100)width of screen frame (cm)w-hgt =

(D=100)height of screen frame(cm)w-dst =

(D=200)screen frame distance from the origin (cm)A straight line drawn between the center of screen frame and theorigin crosses screen surface vertically, and passes through the viewpoint

w-mnw =

(D=100)

number of mesh for horizontal direction

w-mnh =

(D=100)

number of mesh for vertical direction

heaven =(D=y)

topside direction; set x, -x, y, -y, z, or -z

mirror =(D=0)=-1; mirror transformation in horizontal direction

174

Table 7-33: [T-3Dshow] parameter (2)
name

value

explanation

line(D=0) 0, 1

When output = 1, 3
0: material boundary + surface boundary
1: material boundary + surface boundary + region boundary

r-out =

(D=50000)

radius of outer void including view point,
and light source(cm)shadow =(D=0)

shadow level (0:no shadow, 2 is recommended)bright =(D=0.8)brightness limit (1:max, 0:no brightness)dark =(D=0.2)

darkness limit (1:no darkness, 0:max)

box =

(D=0)

box = (D=0) number of penetration box, maximum 5box

10 digits

box definition (see below)

matinbox =(omissible)

materials in the box for display

all,

all, all : default (same with no definition)

numberofWhen you set number of materials, define these material numbers inmaterials

the next line. You cannot set number of materials by negative.

(next line)258

material numbers

reginbox =(omissible)

regions in the box for display

all,

all : default (same with no definition)

region numbers

If the matinbox is defined for this region, this region is not displayed.

1 (default)

The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times withresol =

gshow or rshow option.
width =

0.5 (default)

The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow option.

file =

file nameDefine file names as same number of axis

angel =

(omissible)

angel parametersx-txt =

(omissible)

x axis title

y-txt =

(omissible)

y axis title

z-txt =

(omissible)

z axis title

epsout =0 (default), 1

If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps filename is named by replacing the extension into ―.eps‖.

Definition rules for ―reg=‖, and ―reginbox =‖ are the same as that for the region mesh in section
6.1.1.
For saving calculating time, an outer region defined by the radius ―r-out‖ is introduced additionally.
You have to use a larger ―r-out‖ value when you use large geometry, or you want to put the light source
and view point far away. This new definition of the outer region can be seen in input echo. Therefore, you
can not use an input echo by ―icntl=11‖ as an input for next calculation.
Shadow is not created if the view point and light source are set the same position.

175

7.15.1 box definition
Maximum 5 penetration boxes can be defined. Defined boxes become transparent. To define the box,
you first set three points as b0(x0,y0,z0), b1(x1,y1,z1), and b2(x2,y2,z2). We define the 4-th point b3
from b0 by L cm on the vertical direction of the plane defined by these three point, i.e. ( b2 - b0 )direction. In this ―box‖ definition, you can use the coordinate transformation as ―trcl =‖ transform number
or ―trcl = (........)‖ before the definition of the points.
The box definition is shown below. Each relations are also shown in Figure 7-2.

box = 2box x0 y0 z0
x1 y1 z1x2 y2 z2 L
box trcl = 2x0 y0 z0x1 y1 z1x2 y2 z2 L
box *trcl = (0 0 0 0 90 90 90 60 150 90 30 60
0.0 0.0 0.0-5.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 5.0 5.0-1)Fig. 7-2. Example of box difinition176

7.15.2 3dshow example
List 7.3 ● [T-3Dshow] example
1: [cell]
2:
1 0 -1 fill=1
3:
2 0 -41 42 -43 44 -45 46 u=1 fill=5
4:
22 0 -41 42 -43 44 -45 46 u=1 trcl=(0 0 20) fill=65:23 like 22 but trcl=(0 0 40) fill = 7
6:
5 0 -21 22 -23 24 -25 26 u=5 lat=1 fill=3
7:
6 0 -21 22 -23 24 -25 26 u=6 lat=1 fill= -1:1 0:0 0:0 2 2(0 0 5) 2
8:
7 0 -21 22 -23 24 -25 26 u=7 fill= -1:1 0:0 0:0 2 3 2 lat=19:3 1 3.97300E-02 3 u=2
10:
4 6 4.18280E-02 -3 u=2
11:
13 5 8.47130E-04 -3 u=3
12:
14 3 1.23620E-01 3 u=3
13:
8 -1 +1
14: [surface]15:
1 rpp -15 15 -5 5 -5 55
16:
21 px
5
17:
22 px -5
18:
23 py
5
19:
24 py -520:
25 pz 1521:
26 pz -522:41 px 1523:42 px -15
24:
43 py
5
25:
44 py -526:
45 pz 1527:
46 pz -528:
5 rpp -20 20 -5 5 -5 35
29:
6 rpp -20 20 -5 5 -5 1530:
7 rpp -20 20 -5 5 35 55
31:
3 c/y 0 10 4
In above geometry, the whole body is rectangular solid, and it has rectangular solid lattices including
cylinders inside. You can make graphical plot for the geometry by the 3dshow as,
List 7.3 ● [T-3Dshow] example
1: [t-3dshow]
2:
output = 3
3:heaven = x4:resol = 2
5:width = 0.1
6:x0 = 07:
y0 = 08:z0 = 259:e-the = 70
10:e-phi = 50
11:e-dst = 100012:
l-the = 50
13:l-phi = 25
14:
l-dst = 2000
15:
w-wdt = 60
16:w-hgt = 40
17:
w-dst = 150
18:
file = dshow.dat
177

The output result is ,You can add region boundary by option line=1 as,

You can see how lattices are set up. Next, let material number 5 be transparent, and add shadows bymaterial = -1
5
shadow = 2

178

Let’s define a box.
box = 1
box

0

10

30

100

10

30

0

10 100 100

The defined box part becomes transparent, and you can see inside of the body.

In the last example, add
reg = ( 3 < 6[0 0 0] )matinbox = 1
6
Regions defined by reg = (3 < 6[0 0 0] ) become transparent, and material number 6 becomes visible.

You can display any complex structures as you like combining with these options.

179

8 Volume and Area calculation by tally function
Sometimes, you need to obtain volumes of region and areas of crossing surface for tally definitions.
You can obtain these values by using the tally itself by the Monte Carlo method.
In order to calculate volume and area by the Monte Carlo method, you have to calculate the flux passthrough the region or the crossing surface by making use of the spatially uniform trajectories. You canmake uniform trajectories by using the cylinder (s-type=1,4) or the prism (s-type=2,5) with the disc source(z1=z0 in cylinder source) or rectangular source (z1=z0 in prism source), and with constant direction. For
the volume calculation, you can use the track tally with unit=4, and giving 1 for volume input. For thearea calculation, you can use the cross tally with unit=1, and giving 1 for area input. As a factor, for bothcases, you should put the area of the rectangular source or the area of the disc source. The results of theflux give you the values of volume (cm3) or area (cm2) which you need. If you give an accurate value tothe volume or area input, resulting flux must be 1 when Monte Carlo calculation is correct.
The week point of this method is that the error does not decrease with number of histories easily
when there are structures or surfaces parallel with the beam direction. In addition, ―r-in‖ and ―r-out‖
definitions become diffcult in the cross tally. In order to resolve the problem, the spherical shell source(s-type=9,10) is prepared. Set ―r1=r2‖ in order to use the spherical shell source. And set ―dir=-all‖ inorder to make an inside direction source with ―cos‖ distribution. Particle trajectories by the source become
uniform in the sphere. In addition, this source is given a cos2 bias in order to make good statistics incenter region. You have to set r2 as the factor for volume and area calculations. In the case you define
one-way crossing surface tally for the r-in and r-out (see section 6.2), you have to set 2r2 as the factor.
For all cases mentioned above, you should set ―icntl=5‖ for non reaction calculation. The volume andarea calculations are also useful for check of your geometry. You may find some geometry errors after the
calculation.
An example using the spherical shell source is shown below.
List 8.1 ● Source example for volume, and area calculation
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:

[Source]s-type = 9
proj = protone0 = 500.0x0 = 0.0
y0 = 0.0
z0 = 30.0
r1 = 18
r2 = 18
dir =-all

In this example, a sphere with the center (0, 0, 30) and radius 18 cm, is defined. Decide the centerand radius in which an interest region or crossing surface is included in the sphere. You can set any
projectiles and energies.

180

List 8.2 ● Tally example for volume calculation
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:

[T-Track]mesh = reg
reg = 1 2 3 4 5e-type = 2
emin = 0.
emax = 1000.0
ne = 1
axis = reg
unit = 4
file = volume.dat
factor = 18**2*pi
volume
non
reg
vol
1
1 1.0000E+00
2
2 1.0000E+00
3
3 1.0000E+00
4
4 1.0000E+00
5
5 1.0000E+00

A tally example for volume calculation is shown above. As the example, define an interest region, set
1 to a group energy region including the source energy, set the ―unit=4‖, and set the factor as r2. In thecase the volume input is set 1 automatically because of ―unit=4‖, so you do not need the volume section
here. You can obtain a volume value by this tally, and you can used it as input data for volume definition
in your actual calculation.
List 8.3 ● Tally example for area calculation
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

[T-Cross]mesh = reg
reg = 3r-in r-out
area
1
2 1.0000E+00
2
3 1.0000E+00
3
4 1.0000E+00
e-type = 2
emin = 0.
emax = 1000.0
ne = 1
axis = reg
unit = 1
file = area.dat
factor = 18**2*pi*2

A tally example for area calculation is shown above. As the example, define an interest surface, set 1
to a group energy region including the source energy, set the ―unit=1‖, and set the factor as 2r2. You canobtain a area value by this tally, and you can used it as input data for area definition in your actual
calculation.
When you set ―r-in‖,and ―r-out‖ as
4:
5:
6:

r-in
r-out
area
( 1 2 ) ( 1 2 ) 1.0000E+00( 2 3 ) ( 2 3 ) 1.0000E+00
181

7:

( 3 4 ) ( 3 4 )1.0000E+00

In this case, you don’t need factor 2, i.e., you can user2 as a factor.

182

9 Processing dump file
You can write down information of transport particles on dump file by the [T-Cross], [T-Time],[T-Product] tallies. If you set the dump file as a source, you can calculate the sequential transport.
Furthermore, you can get the information which cannot be obtained by the tally functions in PHITS byprocessing the dump file. To process the dump file, however, you need to make program to process thedump file. In the following, we show a program to process the dump file as an example of such program.
The following program is a simple program which converts the ascii dump file to binary dump file,and vice versa. The following simple program could help you to make a program to process the dump file.
The source program dump-a.f is attached in the holder ―src‖ and the execute file dump a.exe in Windows
system is include in the holder ―bin‖.
List 9.1 ● source code of dump-a.f
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:
41:
42:

***************************************************************************
This program exchanges the binary data and the ascii data**of dump file.
****modified by K.Niita on 2005/08/15
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
************************************************************************
implicit real*8 (a-h,o-z)*----------------------------------------------------------------------dimension isdmp(0:30)
dimension jsdmp(0:30)
data isdmp / 31*0 /data jsdmp / 31*0 /character chin*80
character chot*80
logical exex
character dmpc(30)*4
data dmpc / ' kf',' x',' y',' z',' u',' v',' w',&' e',' wt',' tm',' c1',' c2',' c3',&
' sx',' sy',' sz',' n0',' nc',' nb',' no',
&
'
','
','
','
','
','
',
&
'
','
','
','
'/
dimension dmpd(30)dimension dmpp(30)data dmpp / 2112., 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 1.0,&
100., 1.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0,&
0.0,
0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0,&
0.0,
0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0,&
0.0,
0.0, 0.0/*----------------------------------------------------------------------in = 5
io = 6
id = 20
ia = 21iserr = 0*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
user program frag : 0 => no, 1 => with user program*----------------------------------------------------------------------183

43:
44:
45:
46:
47:
48:
49:
50:
51:
52:
53:
54:
55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
60:
61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
67:
68:
69:
70:
71:
72:
73:
74:
75:
76:
77:
78:
79:
80:
81:
82:
83:
84:
85:
86:
87:
88:
89:
90:
91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:
100:
101:
102:
103:

iuser = 0*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
read ascii or binary frag*----------------------------------------------------------------------write(io,*) ' ** 0 => read binary to ascii'
write(io,*) ' ** 1 => read ascii to binary'read(in,*,end=993) iasb*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
read the name of input dump file*----------------------------------------------------------------------write(io,*)write(io,*) ' ** put the file name of input dump file'read(in,'(a80)',end=998) chininquire( file = chin, exist = exex )if( exex .eqv. .false. ) thenwrite(io,*) ' ** Error : the file does not exist'
goto 999
end ifif( iasb .eq. 0 ) thenopen(id, file = chin,&
form='unformatted',status = 'old' )
else
open(id, file = chin,&
form='formatted',status = 'old' )end if*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
read the number of data and data sequence*----------------------------------------------------------------------write(io,*)write(io,*) ' ** put the number of data in a record'read(in,*,end=997) isdmp(0)write(io,*)write(io,*) ' ** put the ID numbers of data in a record'read(in,*,end=996) ( isdmp(i), i = 1, isdmp(0) )do k = 1, isdmp(0)if( isdmp(k) .gt. 20 .or.
&
isdmp(k) .le. 0 ) goto 992
jsdmp(isdmp(k)) = k
end dowrite(io,*)write(io,'('' # dump data : '',30(a4))')&( dmpc(isdmp(j)), j = 1, isdmp(0) )*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
read the name of output dump file*----------------------------------------------------------------------write(io,*)write(io,*) ' ** put the file name of output'
read(in,'(a80)',end=998) chotinquire( file = chot, exist = exex )if( exex .eqv. .true. ) thenwrite(io,*)write(io,*) ' ** Warning : the file already exists'
write(io,*) ' ** Do you want to overwrite ?'write(io,*) ' ** Yes <= 0, No <= 1'read(in,*,end=995) iyes
if( iyes .ne. 0 ) goto 999
end ifif( iasb .eq. 0 .or. iuser .ne. 0 ) thenopen(ia, file = chot,&
form='formatted',status = 'unknown' )
else
184

104:
105:
106:
107:
108:
109:
110:
111:
112:
113:
114:
115:
116:
117:
118:
119:
120:
121:
122:
123:
124:
125:
126:
127:
128:
129:
130:
131:
132:
133:
134:
135:
136:
137:
138:
139:
140:
141:
142:
143:
144:
145:
146:
147:
148:
149:
150:
151:
152:
153:
154:
155:
156:
157:
158:
159:
160:
161:
162:
163:
164:

open(ia, file = chot,
form='unformatted',status = 'unknown' )end if*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
read the number of records to read*----------------------------------------------------------------------write(io,*)write(io,*) ' ** put the number of records to read'
write(io,*) ' ** all <= 0, or positive integer'read(in,*,end=994) irec*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
start reading the data*----------------------------------------------------------------------write(io,*)write(io,*) ' ** start read and write the data'*----------------------------------------------------------------------jrec = 0100
jrec = jrec + 1
if( irec .gt. 0 .and. jrec .gt. irec ) goto 500
687
continueif( iasb .eq. 0 ) thenread(id,end=688,err=690)&( dmpd(isdmp(k)), k = 1, isdmp(0) )else
read(id,'(30(1p1d24.15))',end=688,err=690)&( dmpd(isdmp(k)), k = 1, isdmp(0) )end ifgoto 689
688
if( irec .gt. 0 ) thenrewind id
goto 687
else
goto 500
end if690
continueiserr = iserr + 1
write(io,'('' ** Error in dump file no ='',i5)') iserrgoto 687
689
continue*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
user program here*----------------------------------------------------------------------if( iuser .ne. 0 ) thendo k = 1, 20
if( jsdmp(k) .gt. 0 ) dmpp(k) = dmpd(k)end dokf = nint( dmpp(1) )x = dmpp(2)y = dmpp(3)z = dmpp(4)u = dmpp(5)v = dmpp(6)w = dmpp(7)e = dmpp(8)wt = dmpp(9)t = dmpp(10)n1 = nint( dmpp(11) )n2 = nint( dmpp(12) )n3 = nint( dmpp(13) )sx = dmpp(14)sy = dmpp(15)
&

185

165:
166:
167:
168:
169:
170:
171:
172:
173:
174:
175:
176:
177:
178:
179:
180:
181:
182:
183:
184:
185:
186:
187:
188:
189:
190:
191:
192:
193:
194:
195:
196:
197:
198:
199:
200:
201:
202:
203:
204:
205:
206:
207:
208:
209:
210:
211:
212:
213:
214:
215:
216:
217:
218:
219:
220:

sz = dmpp(16)n0 = nint( dmpp(17) )nc = nint( dmpp(18) )nb = nint( dmpp(19) )no = nint( dmpp(20) )end if*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
write data on the file*----------------------------------------------------------------------if( iuser .eq. 0 ) thenif( iasb .eq. 0 ) thenwrite(ia,'(30(1p1d24.15))')&( dmpd(isdmp(k)), k = 1, isdmp(0) )else
write(ia)&( dmpd(isdmp(k)), k = 1, isdmp(0) )end ifend if*----------------------------------------------------------------------goto 100*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
end of process*----------------------------------------------------------------------500
continue
write(io,*) ' ** end of read and write the data'
write(io,'('' ** number of processed records is '',&i8)') jrec-1
write(io,*)close( id )close( ia )goto 999*----------------------------------------------------------------------992 continue
write(io,*) ' ** Error : ID should be 1 - 20'
goto 999
993 continue
write(io,*) ' ** Error : the ascii or binary frag is wrong'goto 999
994 continue
write(io,*) ' ** Error : the number of records is wrong'goto 999
995 continue
write(io,*) ' ** Error : the answer should be 0 or 1'
goto 999
996 continue
write(io,*) ' ** Error : the ID numbers is wrong'goto 999
997 continue
write(io,*) ' ** Error : the number of data is wrong'goto 999
998 continue
write(io,*) ' ** Error : file name is wrong'goto 999
999 continue
stop
end

The input parameters are read from a normal input, i.e. from console, in an interactive way. Whenyou execute the program, it asks you as,186

** 0 => read binary to ascii** 1 => read ascii to binary
You put 0 for binary, 1 for ascii. Next it asks you the name of target dump file.
** put the file name of input dump file
You put the name of target dump file.
** put the number of data in a record
The program ask you the number of data in a record. You put positive number for both ascii andbinary.
** put the ID numbers of data in a record
You put ID for the data. See kind of dump data and ID in tallies 59 and 60.
** put the file name of output
You put the file name of output. If the file already exists, the program asks you whether the file canbe overwritten or not.
Next, the program asks you how many records are processed.
** put the number of records to read** all <= 0, or positive integer
If this number is larger than total record number, the program turns back to the top of the data.
Finally, the number of records actually processed is shown.
When you make a program based on this program, you should change ―iuser‖ to 1 at 35 line in above
list. Then the program does not write the converted data on file. In this case, the output is written by ascii.
In 150-169 lines, there are variables ―kf, x, y, z, u, v, w, e, wt, t, n1, n2, n3, sx, sy, sz, n0, nc, nb, no ‖.
Here kf means the kf-code of the particles (see table 4-4), x, y, z are coordinate (cm), u, v, w denote theunit vector of the direction of the particle, e is the energy (MeV, or MeV/nucleon for nucleus), wt is theweight, time is the initial time (ns), c1, c2, c3 are the values of counters, and sx, sy, sz are the unit vectorof the direction of spin, respectively By using these variables, you can make a program to obtain desiredquantities.

187

10 Output cutoff data format
Information for neutron, photon, electron, positron, and proton below the cut off energy can be
written in the output file (file(12), file(13), and file(10)), in order to continue these transport calculation
by other Monte Carlo codes such as MCNP and EGS4. The data are written in binary. The format isshown below.

rd, rn, ( data(i), i = 1, nint(abs(rd)) )rd, rn, ( data(i), i = 1, nint(abs(rd)) )................
................

First, in the case of ―incut = 1‖, and no importance option (rd<0)

rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), i = 1, n )rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), i = 1, n )................
................

Next, ―incut =1‖ with importance option (rd>0),

rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), wt(i), i = 1, n )rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), wt(i), i = 1, n )................
................

―incut = 2‖ and no importance option (rd<0),

rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), t(i), i = 1, n )rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), t(i), i = 1, n )................
................

―incut = 2‖ with importance option (rd>0),

rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), wt(i), t(i), i = 1, n )rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), wt(i), t(i), i = 1, n )................
................
where ―n = nint(rn)‖, x, y, z is a coordinate(cm), e(i) is an energy(MeV), u(i), v(i), w(i) is an unit
vector of momentum, wt(i) is an weight, andt(i) is time(ns). In the case ―igcut =3‖, the particle identifier
188

p(i) is written instead of t(i) in the case of ―incut =2‖.
p(i) = 3.0 is photon, p(i) = 4.0 is electron, and p(i) = 5.0 is positron.
11 Supplementary explanation for region error checking
When you make a complicated geometry, it is easy to mistake the region definition such as double
defined, and non-defined region. In the case, results might have some uncertainties even if the calculation
is finished normally. You can see the summary of region error in the last part of calculation summary. If
some errors are found, check your geometry definition. Results are not certifiable when region errors exist.
When you make the complicated geometry, you are recommended to use graphical geometry viewers suchas CGVIEW and MARS-PF with ―icntl = 2, 4‖ options. Especially, CGVIEW can survey if region errors
exist or not.
The geometry checking method only by PHITS is explained as followings. First, set ―icntl =5‖ for
non-reaction and non-ionization processes. Then set small value into the ―deltm‖ as ―deltm=1‖. (youshould add fraction in order to avoid the ―deltm‖ becomes integer multiple of a distance between regions)―igchk =1‖ is required to examine region crossing particles. You can use the default value for the deltb.
Then, set as ―s-type = 1 – 5‖ and ―dir = all‖.
By the definition, an isotropic source is used. Now run PHITS with small number of histories to see
the CPU time with these options. Then set an actual number of histories for geometry check calculation,and run the code. If some errors are found, it is outputted in the standard output.
In addition, if you add some values into the ―igerr‖ as ―igerr = 10‖ , a particle can go through error
regions and look for further error regions. You may find additional error regions by the option.
12 Additional explanation for the parallel computing
12.1 PHITS input file definition
In the parallel computing, you must use the input file named phits.in, and the phits.in should be
written as
file = input_file_name12.2 maxcas, maxbch definition
In PHITS , the parallel computing is performed in number of batch unit. So number of batch should
be an integer multiple of all number of PE-1. (1 PE is used for control) If not, PHITS converts
automatically the batch number as it becomes an integer multiple and as the total number of event
becomes almost the same as given events. In the case, some comments are outputted at the end of an input
echo. Output information in every batch is given in every number of batch× (PE-1 ). Terminating PHITS
is also done by this unit.
12.3 Treatment of abnormal end
When PHITS stops by abnormal end in a PE, the PE is removed from operation. Finally, a total result
by remained PE is given as a final result. In this case, you should pay attention for the ‖ncut‖ file. The―ncut‖ is incomplete.

18912.4 PHITS startup
phits.sh is prepared for starting up the parallel PHITS as
List 12.1
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:

● PHITS startup shell#!/bin/csh## PHITS exe shell##PBS -N AAA#PBS -q short<----- qsub class setting

cd /home/j5681/niita/ex01<----- execution directory

mpirun -np 8 ../phits100p > nmtcjam.dat<----- number of PE settings

You can customize it easily. The file can be run by the qsub asqsub phits.sh
12.5 ncut, gcut, pcut and dumpall file definition in the PHITS
For the parallel calculation, ncut, gcut, and pcut can be defined in an input file as normally asfile(12) = temp/ncut.dat
In 1 PE calculation, specified ncut.dat is written normally, but in multi PE calculation, ncut.dat is
written separately in each node as/wk/j9999/temp/ncut.dat
where ―j9999‖ is your user-name which is read in automatically from the environmental variable
LOGNAME. By default, your user-name is put in the LOGNAME in the UNIX system.
Before parallel calculation, make j9999 directory under the /wk directory for each node. If you wantto make ―ncut‖ file in a directory not named by your user-name, change environmental variable
LOGNAME before parallel calculation. In the case, confirm there exists the directory you specified under
the /wk.
―inpara, igpara, and ippara‖ are prepared for writing options. By default, they have zero value. If you
give value 1, output files are given IP numbers as/wk/j9999/temp/ncut.dat.005
where 005 is the IP numbers.
If you give 2 or 3 into ―inpara, igpara, and ippara‖, the default file path/wk/j9999/
190

is not added. 3 puts IP number at the end of file as same as 1.
12.6 Read in file definition in the PHITS
Read in files for PHITS are the trxcrd.dat, the data file for photon emissions from residual nuclei, andthe Decay-Turtle source file. The former is 2.6MB size file and is read only one time. It gives only small
effect to network traffic. So the ―trxcrd.dat‖ can be located at one place. But latter is, sometimes, 100MB
size and is read in every events. It gives a large effect to network traffic. So you should copy the
Decay-Turtle data file and put them in each PE as /wk/j9999/turtle/sours.dat, and define as file =/wk/j9999/turtle/sours.dat in the PHITS input.

191

13 FAQ
13.1 Questions related to parameter setting
Q1.1 How can we precisely simulate motion of low-energy neutrons? How can we use nuclear datalibrary in PHITS?
A1.1 As the default setting of PHITS, nuclear reactions induced by low-energy neutrons are simulatedusing Bertini model, which is generally considered to be inapplicable to neutrons below 20 MeV. Hence,
you need to obtain nuclear data libraries such as JENDL and ENDF written in the ACE format.
Availability of those nuclear data libraries depends on the country and institute which you belong to. Afterobtaining nuclear data libraries, you have to set ―emin(2)‖ and ―dmax(2)‖ in the [Parameter] section,
where appropriate values of these parameters vary with the library that you use (generally 1.0e-10 and 20
for emin(2) and dmax(2), respectively). You also have to specify ―file(7)‖ in the [Parameter] section. The
cross section directory file generally named ―xsdir‖ is to be included in the package of the nuclear datalibraries. In the fist line of ―xsdir‖, you have to define the directory where you put the libraries, e.g.
datapath = /opt/xsec/libraryQ1.2 How can we simulate motion of photons, electrons and positrons?
A1.2 As the default setting of PHITS, photons, electrons and positrons are immediately cutoff when they
are created. In order to transport these particles, you have to obtain their data libraries such as el** andmcplib**. After obtaining such libraries, you have to set emin(12-14) and dmax(12-14) in the [Parameter]
section. Typical values of these parameters are 1.0e-3 and 1.0e3 for emin(12-14) and dmax(12-14),
respectively, although dmax(14) can be extended up to 1.0e5. See A1.1 in more detail.
Q1.3 How can we simulate motion of heavy ions?
A1.3 As the default setting of PHITS, heavy ions are immediately cutoff when they are created. In order
to transport these particles, you have to set emin(15-19) in the [Parameter] section. The recommended
value for these parameters is 1.0e-3.
Q1.4 Does the default setting of nuclear reaction models give the most accurate result?
A1.4 It depends on the simulation which you would like to perform, but basically, the answer is NO. For
example, you have to use nuclear data library to simulate neutrons below 20 MeV (see A1.1). It is also
recommended to change ―ejamnu‖ and ―eqmdnu‖ in the [Parameter] section to use JAM or JQMD models
for simulating hadron-nucleus interactions, although JQMD is much time consuming in comparison withother models.
Q1.5 What kind of simulation does event-generator mode suit for?
A1.5 Event generator mode suits simulations by which the event-by-event information is necessary to beobtained, e.g. detector response calculations and design of semi-conductor devices. It is also useful for thesimulation that must determine energy and type of charged particles produced by low-energy neutroninteractions. In concrete, event generator mode generally suits does the simulations using [T-Deposit],[T-LET], [T-SED], [T-Yield] and/or [T-Product] tallies. On the other hand, it is not suit for thesimulations only using [T-Track] and/or [T-Cross] tallies, such as shielding calculation. See ―5.2.19 Event
Generator Mode‖ section in more detail.
192

13.2 Questions related to error occurred in compiling or executing PHITS
Q2.1 I cannot compile PHITS.
A2.1 Many reasons are considered. In Linux or Unix system, you have to select your closest machinesetting in ―makefile‖ in the ―src‖ directory. See ―3.2 Compiling the PHITS code‖ section in more detail. If
you would like to compile PHITS in Windows, you have to buy a fortran compiler for Windows. Right
now, we can support for compiling PHITS using Compaq visual fortran or Intel fortran on Windows, on
your request.
Q2.2 Segmentation fault occurred during the execution of PHITS.
A2.2 It might be due to the overflow of the memory used in PHITS. In that case, you have to increase themaximum size of memory acceptable to PHITS. The maximum size is defined as ―mdas‖ parameter in―param.inc‖ in the ―src‖ directory. Thus, you have to increase this number, and re-compile PHITS. You
may also have to increase ―latmax‖ parameter if you would like to use a huge lattice structure such as
voxel phantom. See ―3.6 Array sizes‖ in more detail.
Q2.3 An error occurred when I try to use ―infl:‖ in my PHITS input file.
A2.3 When ―infl:‖ command is used in your PHITS input file (let name input.dat), you cannot directly
type the name of input file after PHITS execution command on your console even using Linux or Unix ,e.g.
phits100 < input.dat > output.dat (Bad example)
In that case, you have to follow the procedure for executing PHITS on Windows console, e.g.
phits100 < phits.in > output.dat (Good example)
where only one line ―file = input.dat‖ is writte in ―phits.in‖ file. See ―3.4 Executable file‖ section in moredetail
Q2.4 An error occurred when I try to execute PHITS on Linux or Unix console, but I can execute it on
Windows using the same input file.
A2.4 Many reasons are considered to cause the error, but the most probable one is the difference of―return code‖ used in Linux (or Unix) and Windows. If you prepare your input file in your Windows
computer, and transfer to your Linux (or Unix) system using FTP software, you have to check the statusof transfer mode; i.e. you have to select ―ASCII mode‖ in your FTP software.
13.3 Questions related to Tally
Q3.1 What is the difference between [T-Heat] and [t-deposit] tallies?
A3.1 The values calculated by [T-Heat] includes the deposition energy estimated using the Kerma
approximation as well as the energy of cutoff neutrons and photons. On the other hand, the value
calculated by [T-Deposit] includes only the deposition energy from charged particles due to their
ionization energy loss. Thus, if you do not employ Event-Generator mode in your simulation, you have toselect [t-heat] tally. [T-Deposit] is useful for calculating deposition energy weighted by user defined
function, such as Q(L) relationship for calculating dose equivalent. See ―7.11 [T-Deposit]‖ section in
more detail.

193

Q3.2 The track length or fluence of heavy ions calculated by [T-Track] or [T-Cross] is strange.
A3.2 It might be due to the miss-define of the energy mesh in the tally section. The energy of heavy ionsshould be defined in MeV in the tally section, although it should be written in MeV/nucleon in the[Parameter] section.
Q3.3 Results obtained by [T-LET] and/or [T-SED] tally are strange.
A3.3 You have to check the density of material selected by ―letmat‖. If you select the material that is not
used in your geometry, you have to define its material density in [Material] section.
Q3.4 How can we estimate the statistical uncertainty from the tally output?
A3.4 The relative errors written in the tally output are estimated from number of events contributing to thetally. However, this relative error is NOT equal to the statistical uncertainty of the tallied quantity. If you
would like to estimate the statistical uncertainty, you have to execute PHITS several times by setting―rseed < 0‖ in the [Parameter] section, and calculate the standard deviation of each tally output, using
your own program.
Q3.5 Can I use ―dump‖ function when I execute PHITS in parallel machine?
A3.5 The ―dump‖ function does not work in the parallel execution.
13.4 Other questions
Q4.1 How can we normalize PHITS outputs when I use the isotropic source (s-type=9 or 10, dir = -all) ?
A4.1 If there is nothing inside the sphere of the isotropic source, the fluence inside the sphere isnormalized to 1//r12 (/source), where r12 is the radius of the sphere. Thus, if you would like to convert thetally output (/source) to the unit fluence, you have to multiply the result with r12. It should be noted thatthe weight control method is employed in generating the isotropic source, and thus, the event-by-event
information cannot be derived from the simulation using the isotropic source. If you would like to obtain
event-by-event information for isotropic irradiation, you have to write your own ―usrsors.f‖ to generate
the isotropic source, and set ―s-type = 100’. We can send its sample program on your request.

194

14 Concluding remarks
We have developed multi-purpose particle and heavy ion transport Monte Carlo code system PHITS
to simulate the particle induced nuclear reactions up to 200 GeV and the nucleus-nucleus collisions. The
event generator mode, which was recently incorporated in PHITS, can calculate, as an exmple, LET
distributions of particles in matter or energy-deposition distributions event by event, and correlations
between energy depositions in different regions on a scale. This mode opens a various possibility to
calculate the effects of particle radiation on biological and non-biological materials, e.g. risk for single
event upsets in electronic devices.
Newly introduced tally: [T-SED] makes possible to estimate RBE of charged particles by considering
the productions of -rays and Auger electrons based on track structure simulation. This method gives tousers in various research fields a hint beyond hierarchy from microscopic to macroscopic structures.
Usually it is very difficult to connect simulation codes in the different structure levels, because of huge
CPU time. However, this method overcomes the difficulty by making functions fitting the results of asimulation code and incorporating another code.
PHITS has been developed under the collaboration of JAEA, RIST and KEK. The code is to be further
improved in future under collaboration of these institutes together with other universities/institutes allover the world. The following items are considered to be implemented in near future:1.

Microscopic treatment of ionization process without using the continuous slowing down
approximation

2.

High-energy photo-nuclear reaction model applicable to energies above 20 MeV

3.

Transports of high-energy electrons, positrons and photons by incorporating the EGS5 code14-1)

4.

Function to calculate the time dependences of the induced radioactivities by incorporating the
DCHAIN-SP code14-2) and the DECDC database14-3)

5.

Function for criticality calculation by incorporating the MVP code14-4)

6.

DPA calculations for heavy-ion incident reactions using the Coulomb scattering function

The nuclear-reaction models currently used in PHITS such as JQMD and JAM are also to be brushed up
based on the latest scientific information. Request for future improvements as well as report of bugs anddefects are very much welcome. More information on PHITS is available from its web site:
http://phits.jaea.go.jp

195

Acknowledgement
We would like to thank the developers of NMTC/JAM, Satoshi Chiba, Hiroshi Takada, Shin-ichro Meigo,
Makoto Teshigawara, Fujio Maekawa, Masahide Harada and Yujiro Ikeda for their collaborations.
References1-1) H. Iwase, K. Niita, T. Nakamura : ―Development of general-purpose particle and heavy ion transport
Monte Carlo code‖, J. Nucl. Sci. and Technol. 39, 1142 (2002).
1-2) K. Niita, T. Sato, H. Iwase, H. Nose, H. Nakashima, L. Sihver : ―PHITS- a particle and heavy ion
transport code system‖, Radiation Measurements 41, 1080 (2006).
1-3) K. Niita, et al. : ―High Energy Particle Transport Code NMTC/JAM‖, JAERI-Data/Code 2001-007,
Japan Atomic Energy Research Institute (2001).
1-4) Y. Nara, N. Otuka, A. Ohnishi, K. Niita, S. Chiba : ―Relativistic nuclear collisions at 10A GeV
energies from p+Be to Au+Au with the hadronic cascade model‖, Physical Review C61, 024901(1999).
1-5) K. Niita, S. Chiba, T. Maruyama, H. Takada, T. Fukahori, Y. Nakahara and A.Iwamoto : ―Analysisof the (N,xN’) reactions by quantum molecular dynamics plus statistical decay model‖, PhysicalReview, C 52, 2620 (1995).
2-1) Y. Nara, N. Otuka, A. Ohnishi, K. Niita, S. Chiba : ―Relativistic nuclear collisions at 10A GeV
energies from p+Be to Au+Au with the hadronic cascade model‖, Physical Review C61, 024901(1999).
2-2) Particle-Data-Group: ―Review of Particle Physics‖, Physical Review, D 54, 1 (1996).
2-3) X. N. Wang and M. Gyulassy: ―HIJING: A Monte Carlo model for multiple jet production in pp, pA,
and AA collisions‖, Physical Review, D44, 3501 (1991).
2-4) T. Sostrand: Comp. Phys. Comm. 82, 74 (1994); PYTHIA 5.7 and JETSET 7.4 Physics and Manual.
2-5) B. Zhang and Y. Pang: ―Frame dependence of parton cascade results‖, Physical Review, C56, 2185
(1997).
2-6) G. Kortemeyer, W. Bauer, K. Haglin, J. Murray and S. Pratt: ―Causality violations in cascade models
of nuclear collisions‖, Physical Review, C52, 2714 (1995).
2-7) V. Blobel et al.: ―Multiplicities, topological cross sections, and single particle inclusive distributions
from pp interactions at 12 and 24 GeV/c ―, Nuclear Physics, B69, 454 (1974).
2-8) ―Total Cross-Sections for Reactions of High Energy Particles‖ vol. 12a and vol. 12b edited by A.
Baldni, V. Flaminio, W.G. Moorhead and D.R.O. Morrison. (Springer-Verlag Berlin 1988).
2-9) High-Energy Reactions Analysis Group, CERN Report CERN-HERA 83-01 and 83-02, 1983.
2-10) K. Niita, S. Chiba, T. Maruyama, H. Takada, T. Fukahori, Y. Nakahara and A.Iwamoto : ―Analysisof the (N,xN’) reactions by quantum molecular dynamics plus statistical decay model‖, PhysicalReview, C 52, 2620 (1995).
2-11) S. Chiba, O. Iwamoto, T. Fukahori, K. Niita, T. Maruyama and A. Iwamoto : ―Analysis ofproton-induced fragment production cross sections by the quantum molecular dynamics plus
statistical decay model‖, Physical Review, C 54, 285 (1996).
2-12) S. Chiba, M.B. Chadwick, K. Niita, T. Maruyama and A. Iwamoto : ―Nucleon-induced
preequilibrium reactions in terms of the quantum molecular dynamics‖, Physical Review, C 53 1824
196

(1996).
2-13) S. Furihata : ―Statistical analysis of light fragment production from medium energy proton-induced
reactions‖, Nucl. Instrum. Methods Phys. Res, B 171, 251. (2000).
2-14) J. Aichelin : ―‖Quantum‖ molecular dynamics—a dynamical microscopic n-body approach toinvestigate fragment formation and the nuclear equation of state in heavy ion collisions”, Phys. Rep.
202, 233. (1991).
2-15) I. Tanihata et al. : ―Negative pion production by 800 MeV/A C, Ne, and Ar beams‖, Phys. Lett. B 87,
349 (1979)2-16) Y. Iwata et al. : ―Double-differential cross sections for the neutron production from heavy-ion
reactions at energies E/A=290–600MeV‖, Physical Review, C 64, 054609 (2001).
2-17) T. Kurosawa et al. : ―Measurements of Secondary Neutrons Produced from Thick Targets
Bombarded by High-Energy Helium and Carbon Ions‖, Nucl. Sci. Eng. 132, 30 (1999).
2-18) T. Kurosawa et al. : ―Measurements of Secondary Neutrons Produced from Thick Targets
Bombarded by High Energy Neon Ions‖, J. Nucl. Sci. Technol. 361, 42 (1999).
2-19) T. Kurosawa et al. : ―Spectral measurements of neutrons, protons, deuterons and tritons produced by
100 MeV/nucleon He bombardment‖, Nucl. Instrum. Methods Phys. Res, A 430, 400 (1999).
2-20) T. Kurosawa et al. : ―Neutron yields from thick C, Al, Cu, and Pb targets bombarded by 400
MeV/nucleon Ar, Fe, Xe and 800 MeV/nucleon Si ions‖, Physical Review, C 62, 044615 (2000).
2-21) T. Sato, R. Watanabe and K. Niita, ―Development of a calculation method for estimating the specificenergy distribution in complex radiation fields‖, Radiat. Prot. Dosim. 122, 41-45 (2006).
2-22) T. Sato, Y. Kase, R. Watanabe, K. Niita and L. Sihver, ―Biological dose estimation forcharged-particle therapy using an improved PHITS code coupled with a microdosimetric kinetic
model‖, Radiat. Res. 171, 107-117 (2009).
2-23) International Commission on Radiation Units and Measurements, Microdosimetry (ICRU report;36).
Maryland: ICRU, 1983.
7-1) Y. Sakamoto and Y. Yamaguchi : ‖Dose Conversion Coeffcients in the Shielding Design Calculationfor High Energy Proton Accelerator Facilities‖ JAERI-Tech 2001-042, (2001).
14-1) H. Hirayama et al : ―The EGS5 code system‖, SLAC-R-730 (2005) and KEK Report 2005-8 (2005).
14-2) T. Kai et al : ―DCHAIN-SP 2001: High energy particle induced radioactivity calculation code‖,
JAERI-Data/Code 2001-016 (2001) (in Japanese)
14-3) A. Endo et al : ―Nuclear decay data for dosimetry calculation: Revised data of ICRP Publication 38‖,
JAERI 1347 (2005).
14-4) Y. Nagaya et al : ―MVP/GMVP II: General purpose Monte Carlo codes for neutron and photontransport calculations based on continuous energy and multigroup methods‖, JAERI 1348 (2005).

197